haihongyuan.com
海量文库 文档专家
全站搜索:
您现在的位置:首页 > 初中教育 > 初中英语初中英语

初中英语总复习第一轮教案

发布时间:2013-10-30 10:40:14  

新目标七年级英语(上)期末复习手册

? 句子: Unit1-12重点知识梳理 Unit 1

1.初次见面用语 课P2. 2C

What’s your name? My name is …/ I’m…

Nice to meet you !

2.问电话号码:

What’s your phone number?

What’s his/her phone number?

It’s 3272310. ? 词汇:

1. family name, first name, last name ? 语法:

1. 形容词性物主代词的用法 2. 人称代词主格的用法

3. 基数词:1至10的读法和写法

Unit 2 ? 句子

1.Is this / that your pencil? Yes, it is. No, it isn’t.

2. What’s this in English?

It’s a pen/ ruler/ book….

How do you spell pen/ ruler/book? P-E-N.

? 核心知识

1. 认识26个字母,辅音字母,元音字母

2. 认识一般疑问句的句式 ? 写作:课P11.3a Found and Lost

Unit 3 ? 句子:

1.介绍别人或某物

This is … That is …

These are … Those are … ? 词汇:课P13 1a ? 写作:

1.学习英语信的格式 2.课P17 以信的形式介绍相片中人物

Unit 4 ? 句子 询问地方

Where is / are … ?It’s …/ They are … ? 核心知识

1. 词汇 课P24 1 2. take 与bring 的区别

3. there be 的用法 4. on the wall

5. 介词:on , in , under , behind ,

next to , between…and…

6. 认识特殊疑问句的句式

? 熟读:P23.3a , P24. 3 , Grammar Focus

? 句子 Unit 5

1. Do you have …? Yes, I do. No, I don’t.

2. Does he / she have …?

Yes, he / she does. No, he / she doesn’t.

3. Let’s …

4. That sounds good / interesting.

That’s a good idea.

5. Welcome to … ? 核心知识

一、there be 与have 的区别

课本:P25 1a , P26 G.F. , P27 3b,

P28 1a , P30 1与3

? 句子 询问所喜欢的东西 Unit 6

1. Do you like….? Yes, I do. No, I don’t.

2. Does he like …? Yes, he does. No, he does. ? 核心知识

1.一般现在时

2. 可数名词与不可数名词

3. lots of 4. go on picnic

5. health, healthy, healthily

6. P36 1 ? 熟读

课本: P31 1a , P32 G. F. , P35 3a, P36 1

Unit 7 ? 句子

问价格

1. How much is this T-shirt? It’s 10 dollars.

2. How much are they? They are 100 dollars. 问颜色

1. What color do you want ? What color is it? 购物用语:P39 3a

1. Can I help you? What can I do for you?

2. Yes, please. 3. I’ll take it .

4. Thank you. 5. You’re welcome.

6. Have a look. ? 核心知识

两位数的基数词读法与写法 P40 ? 熟读

课本 P37 1c, P38 G. F., P 39 3a ,

P40 1b, P41 3a , P42 1与3

Unit 8 ? 句子

1. When is your birthday?

2. My birthday is January fifteenth.

3. What year were you born?

4. I was born in 1999.

5. When were you born?

6. I was born in January first,1999. ? 核心知识

1. 基数词和序数词

基变序口决

基变序有规律, 词尾加上-th ;

一二三特殊记, 单词结尾t d d ;

八减t , 九减e , f 要把ve替 ;

ty 把y 改为i , 记住前还有e ;

若遇到几十几, 只把个位变序。

2.

3.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) 名词所有格 年、月、日表达法 年的读法:用基数词,两位一读 月份名称的首字母要大写 日期:用序数词表示,前面可加the ,也可省略,但读要读出the 年、月、日在英语中的顺序是

月、日、年

4. 时间介词 in, on , at

5. how old

6. be born

7. basketball game ? 熟读

课本 P47 1a , P48 2a 2d , P52 1

? 写作 自我介绍(姓名、年龄、生日、爱好、出生地等)

Unit 9 ? 句子

1. Do you want to …? Yes, I do . No, I don’t.

2. Does he want to …?

Yes, he does. No, he doesn’t.

3. What kind of movies do you like?

I like action movie. ? 核心知识

1. 并列连词 and , but

2. on weekends 3. want to do sth.

4. look at 5. a lot

6. in a word 7. act, actor

8. in fact 9. 一般现在时

10. 名词复数形式 ? 写作 谈论自己爱好的电影类型 课本P56-57 ? 熟读 课本 P54 G.F. , P55 3a

Unit 10 ? 句子

1. Can you play the guitar?

Yes, I can. No, I can’t

2. Can he/ she sing?

Yes, he/she can. No, he / she can’t.

3. What can you do ?

4. What club do you want to join? ? 核心知识

1. 情态动词 can 表能力

2. play the guitar / drums / piano

3. play chess 4. help sb. with sth.

5. be good with 6. music-----musician

7. talk to ? 熟读 课本 P60 G.F. , P63 3a对话 P64 3

? 句子 Unit 11 问时间

1. What time do you go to school?

I go to school at 7a.m.

2. What time does he / she go to school?

He / She goes to school at 8a.m.

感叹句 what 引导

? 核心知识

1.一般现在时 2. 时刻读法

3. on TV 4. go to bed

5. go to school 6. go to work

7. get up 8. get home

9. thanks for 10. take a shower

11. eat breakfast / lunch / dinner

12. do homework 13. listen to

14. and then 15. like to do

16. a little 17. put on

18. take 搭车 19. all night

20. in the morning / afternoon / evening ? 写作

记一天所做的事情 课本P67 3a , P69 3a ? 熟读 课本 P38 1a 2a 2b

Unit 12 ? 句子

1. What’s your favorite subject?

My favorite subject is English.

2. Why do you like …? Because it is interesting. ? 核心知识

1. 名词所有格 2. 星期

3. have math / Chinese 4. then , next ? 写作 课本P75 3a, P76 3

介绍自己一天所上的科目以及自己最喜爱的科目,为什么? ? 熟读 课本 P72 G.F. , P 75 3a , P 76

6

新目标七年级英语下期重点词组与句型

Unit 11 What time do you go to school?

1.time: a . 可数名词 (次数) b.不可数名词 (时间)

2.对时间提问用:a.When (何时) b.What time (几点) <只能用于几点几分>

3.go to……(去…...) get to…..(到达…..) <后接地点副词here,there,home等词时,省略介词to>

4.usually(通常) = always (总是)= often(经常) <一般现在时的标志词,常位于be动词、情态动词、助动词之后,实义动词之前>

5.take a shower = have a shower (洗澡)

6.an hour (一个小时)

7.work (不可数)= job (可数) (工作)

8.start = begin to do sth. (开始做某事)

9.时间表达法:(一)顺读法:先读整点,再读几分,遇见0读作“O”;遇到整点可直接读数字,也可在数字后面加“o’clock”.

(二)逆读法:先读分钟数,再读整点;

a.分钟数小于30分钟的用:分钟数+past(过)+整点;

b.分钟数等于30分钟的用:half +past+整点 (几点半);

c.分钟数大于30分钟的用:(60—分钟)+to(差)+下一个整点;

d.15分钟常常用a quarter(一刻钟)来表示;

10.在几点几分用介词 “at”;

11.What time is it now?=What’s the time now? (现在几点了?)

It’s +时刻

12.get up (起床) 13. go to bed (睡觉)

14.get on (上车) 15.get off (下车)

16.eat/have breakfast/lunch/dinner (吃早饭/午饭/晚饭)

17.in the morning/afternoon/evening (在早上/下午/晚上)

18.do homework = do one’s homework (做家庭作业)

19.go home (回家) 20.all day (整天) 21.all night (整晚)

22.around (大约)= about (大约;有关)

23.listen to…..(听……) hear (听见)

24.look at…. (看…..) see (看见) 25.put on (穿上;戴上)

26.take off (脱下) 27.he (主格)—him (宾格)

28.they (主)—them (宾) 29. she (主)—her (宾)

30.it (主/宾格) 31.we (主)—us (宾) 32.I (主)—me (宾)

33.you (主/宾格) 34.tell sb. about…….(告诉某人有关…..)

35.write to….= write a letter to….(写信给…….)

Unit 12 My favorite subject is science.

1.Why……..? (为什么…..?) Because……(因为……)

2.because (因为),so(所以)两者不能同时用于一个句子中。

3.What’s one’s favorite ……? One’s favorite….is…….

4.Who (谁)<作主语时> +动词 (三单式)+ 其它?

eg: Who has a computer? (谁有电脑?)

5.在星期几用 “on”. 6.be busy (忙的) be free (有空)

7.对星期几提问用: What day is it today? (今天星期几?)

7

(It’s) + 星期几.

8.对日期提问用: What’s the date today? (今天是几号?)

(It’s) + 日期.

9.have + 科目 (上…….课) 10.after class (课后)

11.after school (放学后) 12.be tired (疲倦;累的)

13.play with……(和…..玩) 14.like doing sth. (喜欢做…)

15. some (一些) <常用于肯定句中,但也可用于表请求语气的句型中。eg: Can/May/Could I …….?和 Would you like….?

16.any (一些) <常用于否定句和疑问句中>

Unit 1 Where’s your pen pal from?

1.pen pal = penfriend (笔友) 2.be from = come from (来自于..)

3.the United States = the USA = America (美国)

4.the United Kingdom = England = Britain (英国)

5.city (单) cities (复) 6.speak + 语言 (说某种语言)

7.same (相同的) <前面常与the连用,后面接单数名词>

8.different (不同的) <后面接复数名词>

9.too (也)<位于肯定句句末> = also (也) <靠近动词>

10.too (太) <位于形容词之前>

11.Where is/are sb. from? Sb. am/is/are from…….。

12.Where do/does sb. come from?

Sb. come(s) from……

Unit 2 Where’s the post office?

1.There is/are (有) + sth.(某物) +sw. (某处) (有某物在某处)

2.Sb. have/has + sth. (某物) (某人有某物)

3.next to….(贴近;靠近)4.between….and…..(在两者之间)

4.across from…= on the other side of….(在……对面)

5.in front of…..(在…..外面的前面)

6.in the front of……(在…..里面的前面)

7.turn right/left (向右/左转) 8.on the right/left (在右/左边)

9.on one’s right/left (在某人的右/左边)

10.near here = in the neighborhood (在附近)

11.in the picture (在图中) 12.go straight (直走)

13.Go/Walk along/down…..(沿着…..走)

14. 问路: a.Where’s the…….,please? (请问,…… 在哪儿?)

b.Is there a/an……near here/in the neighborhood?

(这儿附近有…….吗?)

15.a. take the + 序数词 +turning +on the right/left

b. turn right/left at the + 序数词 + turning.

16.Excuse me (打扰一下;劳驾一下)

17.You’re welcome = That’s all right. =Not at all. (不用谢)

18.clean ( dirty (脏的) 19.new( old(旧的)

20.big (大的 small (小的) 21.quiet(安静) 忙的)

22.Welcome to…….(欢迎到…….) 23.the way to….(去…..的路)

24.the beginning of…… (…..的开始) 25.go through (穿过)

26.take/have a walk = go for a walk (散步)

8

27.take a taxi/bus (坐的士/汽车) 28.with (和…一起;有着)

29.enjoy doing sth. (喜欢做某事)

Unit 3 Why do you like koalas?

1.kind of = a little bit (有几分) 2.a kind of….(一种….)

3.all kinds of…..(各种各样的…..) 4.be afraid of….(害怕….)

5.leaf ( leaves (复) 6.at night = in the evening (在晚上)

7.smart = clever (聪明) 8.during the day (白天期间)

9.beautiful ugly (丑陋的)

Unit 4 I want to be an actor

1.want to be a/an….(想要当…..) 2.shop assistant (店员)

3.a.What + do/does + sb. +do? b.What + be +sb.?

c.What’s + one’s +job ? (某人是干什么工作的?)

4.give sth. to sb. = give sb. sth. (把某物给某人)

5.talk to/with…..(与….交谈) 6.TV station (电视台)

8.police station (派出所) 9.in a hospital (在医院里)

10.in hospital (住院) 11.go out (出去) 12.go back (回去)

13.come out (出来) 14.come back (回来)

15.in the day (在白天) 16.thief (单 thieves (复)

17.hard = difficult (困难 easy (简单)

18.be in (参加;在家) 19.school play (校园剧)

20.young (年轻的 old (老的)

21.put on (穿上) <动作> wear (穿着) <状态>

22.listen to….(听……) <对象> hear (听见) <结果>

23.look at….(看……) <对象> see (看见) <结果>

Unit 5 I’m watching TV

1.现在进行时: a.现在正在发生或进行的动作.

b.构成: 主语 + be动词 + 动词的现在分词 <两者缺一不可>

c.动词现在分词的构成:<1>一般直接在词尾加“ing”;

<2>以不发音“e”结尾的,去 “e”加 “ing”;

<3>双写最后一个字母,再加 “ing”; eg: begin,get,let,sit,put,run,

drop,hit,forget,swim,stop,travel,plan,shop;

d.现在进行时的标志词:look, listen, now, It’s + 时刻,

2.do one’s homework = do homework (做家庭作业)

3.a.看电视/比赛用“watch”; b.看书/报纸/杂志用“read”;

4.wait for….(等候….) 5.TV show (电视节目)

6.at school/home/work (在学校/家/工作)

7.Make telephone calls (打电话)

a.Hello,here is/it’s + 电话号码 (你好!这儿是……)

b.Hello,may/can/could I speak to……,please?

(你好,我可以与……通话吗?)

c.Who’s that (speaking) ? (你是谁?)

d.This is…….(speaking) . (我是…..)

e.Is that…….(speaking)?/Is…….. there ? (你是….吗?)

Unit 6 It’s raining

1.cloud (云) cloudy (多云的) wind (风) 有风的) 9

sun (太阳) sunny (晴朗的)rain (雨/下雨) rainy (下雨的) snow (雪/下雪) snowy (下雪的)

2.询问天气: What’s the weather like? = How’s the weather ?

It’s + 气候.

3.How’s it going ? (情况怎样了?)

4.pretty (相当) = quite /very (十分) pretty (漂亮) = beautiful

5.hot (热) cold (冷) 6.cool (凉爽) warm (暖和)

7.humid (潮湿) dry (干燥) 8.lie (躺) lying

9.Thanks for sth./doing sth. (因….而感谢)

10.on vacation (度假) 11.on the beach (在沙滩上)

12.take photos/pictures (照相)

13.a group of…(一群…) <后接复数名词>

14.beach volleyball (沙滩排球) 15.be surprised (吃惊的)

16.have a good/great/nice time = have fun (玩得高兴)

17.everyone (每人) someone (某人) everything (一切)

something (某物) nobody (没有人) <作主语时,当作第三人称单数> sth. (想要某人做某事)

19.in order to……(为了….)

Unit 7 What does he look like ?

1.short hair (短发) long hair (长发)

2.straight hair (直发) curly hair (卷发)

3.medium height (中等个子) 4.medium build (中等身材)

5.What does/do + sb. + look like? (某人长什么样?)

a.Sb. + be + 形容词/ b.Sb. has/have + 名词

6.look like = be like (看起来像…….)

7.always (总是) never (决不)

8.stop doing sth. (停止做某事) stop to do sth. (停下来做…..)

9.tell jokes/stories (讲笑话/故事)

10.remember (记得) forget (忘记)

Uuit 8 I’d like some noodles

1. I’d like = I would like she’d like = she would like

2.would like = want to sth./to do sth. (想要某物/做某事)

3.clean (干净的) <形容词> dirty (脏的)/ (打扫) <动词>

4.beef and tomato noodles (牛肉西红柿面)

5.chicken and cabbage noodles (鸡肉白菜面)

6.potato and mutton noodles (土豆羊肉面)

7.What kind of….would you like ? (你想要哪种……?)

What would you like/do you want ?(你想要什么?)

8.What size bowl of noodles would you like?

(你想要多大碗面?)

I’d like a small/medium/large bowl of noodles.

9.as well as…(也;而且) 10.green tea (绿茶)

11.orange juice (桔汁)

12.a. or (或者) <用于选择疑问句中>

b.or (和) <用于连接否定中并列内容>

10 18.want sb.to do

Unit 9 How was your weekend ?

1.一般过去时:过去发生的动作或存在的状态。

a.构成:由be动词/情态动词/实义动词的过去式构成。 b.规则动词过去式的构成:<1>一般在动词词尾加 ed;

<2>以“e”结尾的动词,加 “d”构成;

<3>辅音字母加 “y”结尾的动词,要先变 “y”为 “i”,再加 “ed”;

<4>重读闭音节结尾的动词,先双写最后一个字母,再加 “ed”; eg: stop, plan, travel, drop, shop

c.过去式的标志: yesterday (昨天) /last + 单数名词 (上一个…..) 时间段 + ago (…..以前)/just now = a moment ago (刚才)

2.help sb. with sth. (在….方面帮助某人)

3.help sb. (to) do sth. (帮助某人做某事)

4.do some +动词 “ing” (做点…….) eg; do some reading

5.stay at home (呆在家) 6.have a party (开晚会)

7.visit (a person) (拜访…..) 8.talk show (访谈节目)

9.study for the <math> test (准备….<数学>测验)

10.How/What about….(怎么样?) <用于反问别人或提建议>

11.practice sth./doing sth. (练习…./做某事)

12.How was your weekend? (你周末过得怎样?)

13.What did you do last weekend?(你周末做了什么?)

14.middle school (中学) 15.cook…for sb.(为某人做…饭)

16.It’s time to do sth. /It’s time for sth. (是该….的时候了)

17.sit down (坐下) 18.watch sb. do sth. (观看某人做…)

19.look for….(寻找….) find (找到;发现)

Unit 10 Where did you go on vacation ?

1.summer camp (夏令营) 2.have fun doing sth. (做…快乐)

3.expensive=dear (贵的 cheap (便宜的)

4.两者中的另一个用 “the other”. 5.Sichuan food (川菜)

6.in the water/rain/snow/sun (在水中/雨中/雪中/太阳下)

7.in the corner (在角落里) <内部> at the corner <外部>

8.find sb. doing sth. (发现某人做某事)

9.make sb. do sth. (使某人做某事)

10.decide to do sth. (决定做某事)

11.walk <back> to (走<回>到…..)

12.be lost = get lost (迷路;走散)

13.the Great Wall (长城) 14.the Palace Museum (故宫)

15.Tian’an Men Square (天安门广场)

Unit 11 What do you think of game shows ?

1.What do you think of/about….?(你认为…怎么样?)

How do you like……? (你觉得…..怎么样?)

2.think of/about….. (考虑….)

3.soap opera (肥皂剧) 4.can’t mind (不介意,无所谓)

5.mind doing sth. (反对做…..) 6.game show (游戏节目)

7.in fact (实际上) 8.ask sb. about…..(问某人有关….)

11

9.key ring (钥匙圈) 10.agree with sb. (同意某人)

11.show sth. to sb. = show sb. sth. (出示某物给….)

12.English Today (今日英语) 13.Sports News (体育新闻)

14.Healthy Living (健康生活) 15.Culture China (华夏文化)

16.Chinese Cooking (中国烹饪) 17.Animal World (动物世界)

Unit 12 Don’t eat in class !

1.祈使句;a.以动词原形开头;b.变否定句时,在动词前加 “don’t”;

2.in class (在课上) in the class (在班上)

3.school rules (校规) 4.in the hallways (在走廊里)

5.dinning hall (餐厅) 6.be late for… (…..迟到)

7.get to….. = arrive in/at….= reach… (到达….)

8.have to (不得不) <有时态和人称变化>

must (必须) <无时态和人称变化>

9.else (别的,其它的) <常位于疑问词之后>

10.too many (太多的….) <后接可数名词复数>

too much (太多的…) <后接不可数名词>

11.No + 名词/No + 动词的 “ing” (禁止……..)

12.Children’s Palace (少年宫) 13.Summer Palace (颐和园)

新目标英语七(下)unit1~6单元重点短语及词组

unit1

1、be/come from:来自

2、live in Paris:住在巴黎

3、write to me soon:快点给我写信

4、play sports:运动、锻炼

5、speak a little French:讲一点法语

6、like going to the movies with my friends:

喜欢和我的朋友去看电影

7、tell sb about...告诉某人关于、、、、、、

8、an interesting country: 一个有趣的国家

9、in November: 在十一月

10、speak a little French: 说一点法语

11、like playing sports:喜欢做运动

12、her favorite language:她最喜欢的语言

13、write to Tom:写信给汤姆

14、Jolie’s pen pal:朱利的笔友

15、likes and dislikes:好恶、爱憎

unit2

1、打扰了Excuse me

2、散步 take a walk

3、玩的开心 have fun

4、向左/右转 turn left/right

5、一个干净又宁静的超市 : clean and quiet supermarket

6、一直走 go straight

12

7、穿过公园 go through the park

8、在右边 on the right

9、欢迎来中国 Welcome to China

10、参观格林大道 visit Green Street

11、世界之旅的开始 the beginning of the world tour

12、买一些食品 buy some food

13、饭店隔壁 next to the restaurant

14、乘出租车 take/have a taxi / by taxi

15、沿着长街走 go down /along/up Long Street

16、穿过第六大道 go through Sixth Street

17、在新公园右转 turn right at New Park

18、在大桥街 on Bridge Street

19、旅途愉快 have a good trip

20、去学校的路 the way to school

21、邮局:post office

22、公用电话:pay phone

23、第五大街 Five Avenue

24、中心街道 on Center Street

25、靠近… next to

26、在…对面 be across from

27、在…和…之间 between... and....

28、在一个安静/繁忙的街道上on a quiet/busy street

29、在附近 near here=in the neighborhood

30、在你家附近near your home

31、在你的右边 on your right

32、欢迎到…来 welcome to...

33、花园区 the Garden District

34、花园游览the garden tour

35、步行穿过…take a walk through

36、经过…pass...

37、有花园的房子… a house with a garden

38、….的开头 the beginning of...

39、一个玩的高兴的好地方a good palce to have fun

40、在超市买些食buy some food in the supermarket

41、去我家的路 the way to my home

42、一个干净的公园a clean park

43、一条安静的街道a quiet street

44、一家旧旅馆an old hotel

45、一个繁华的超市a busy supermarket

46、三个很脏的房间three very dirty rooms

unit3

1、let sb do sth.让某人做某事:Let him go .让他走吧。

2、kind of=a bit =a little 稍微、有点

3、有点有趣:kind of interesting 13

4、有点懒:kind of lazy

5、来自南非:be from South Africa

6、对某人友好:be friendly to sb

7、和某人友好相处:be friendly with sb

8、喜欢做某事(习惯性的):like doing sth

9、喜欢做某事(偶尔一次的、未发生的): like to do sth

10、保持安静:be/keep quiet

11、在白天:during/in the day

12、在晚上:at night=in the night

13、每天:every day

14、每天的、日常的:everyday

15、和朋友一起玩:play with one's friends

16、在白天睡觉:sleep during the day

17、他12岁:He is twelve years old.

18、起床:get up

19、吃叶子:eat leavies

unit4

1、他是干什么的?:What does he do?=what's he?=What's his job?

2、和某人一起工作:work with sb

3、在、、、、、、工做:work at/in.....

4、为、、、、、、工作:work for...

5、给某人某物:give sth to sb=give sb sth

6、从、、、、得到、、、、:get sth from ....

7、穿着白色的制服:wear a white uniform(状态)

8、穿上你的衣服:put on your coat(动作)

9、有点危险:kind of dangerous

10、两个小偷:two thieves

11、和某人交谈:talk to/with sb

12、谈论、、、、、:talk about sb/sth

13、问某人问题:ask sb questions

14、工作得晚:work late

15、做某事迟到:be late for sth.

16、出去就餐:go out to dinners

17、忙碌:be busy

18、忙于做、、、: be busy with sth=be busy doing sth

19、对、、、、、、、感兴趣:be/become interested in....

20、一个有趣的工作:an interesting job

21、努力工作:work hard

22、艰苦的工作:hard work

23、一项适合你的工作:a job for you

24、给你提供一个工作:have a job for you

25、和演员一起工作:work with actors

26、打电话给晚报:call the Evening Newspaper

27、在医院:in/at a hospital

28、很多,许多:a lot of=lots of

14

29、 想要做……:want to do...

30、招聘广告:want ads

31、其他年轻人:other young people

32、参加校园剧的演出:be in the school play

33、需要一名医生:need a doctor

34、售货员,店员: sales assistant

35、警官:police officer

36、银行职员:bank clerk

37、 害怕,恐怕…: be afraid of

38、电视台:TV station

39、警察局:police station

40、流行歌手:pop singer

41、重要人物;Very Important Person

42、出去:go out

43、校园剧:school play

44、尽可能快地:as soon as possible

45、晚报:evening newspaper

46、数钱:count money

47、有点儿危险:kind of dangerous

48、写故事:write stories

49、运动教练:a sports coach

50、图书管理员:a library assistant

51、在将来:in the future

unit5

1、看电视:watch TV

2、看书: read a book=read books=do some reading

3、看一只小鸟

5、看电影:go to the movies

6、做家庭作业:do (one's)homework

7、那听起来还不错:That sounds good/nice.

8、写信:write a letter

9、这个电视剧无聊: This TV show is boring/isn't interesting.

10、等候、、、、、:wait for....

11、等候某人做某事:wait for sb to do sth

12、游泳:swim=have a swim=go swimming

13、购物:shop=go shopping=do some shopping

14、在图书馆:in the library

15、 打篮球:play basketball

16、谢谢你的来信:Thanks for your letter.

17、谢谢某人做某事:thanks/thank sb for doing sth

18、在第一张图里:in the first photo

19、一些图片:some photos

20、在游泳池里游泳:swim at the pool

21、下一张图片:the next photo

22、在家里:at home

15

23、和某人在一起:be with sb

24、最后一张图片:the last photo

25、我的全家福:a photo of my family

26、打电话:talk on the phone

27、我的一些照片:some of my photos

28、电视节目:TV show

29、这是、、、、、:This is....(介绍人用)

unit6

1、今天云南的天气怎么样?:How's the weather in Yunnan today?= What's the weather like in Yunnan today?

2、做晚饭:cook dinnner/supper

3、玩电脑游戏:play computer games

4、你怎么样?(两人见面时)How's it going?

5、相当好:pretty good

6、好天气:fine/nice weather

7、在雨中:in the rain

8、一个有风的晚上:a windy night

9、环球节目:Around The World show

10、中央电视台:CCTV

11、阳光明媚的一天:a beautiful,sunny day

12、许多人:many/a lot of /lots of people

13、在度假:on vacation(介词)

14、在度假:take a vacation(动词)

15、多云的:be cloudy

16、刮风的:be windy

17、热的/冷的/温暖的/凉爽的/潮be hot/cold/warm/cool/humid

18、拍照:take photos=take a photo

19、躺在沙滩上:lie on the beach

正 躺在沙滩上:be lying on the beach

20、一群学生:a group of students

21、这群孩子:this group of children

22、打沙滩排球:play beach volleyball

23、看上去很酷/漂亮/年轻:look cool/beautiful/young

24、惊讶:be surprised +从句

25、惊讶做、、、、:be surprised to do sth

26、对、、、、、感到惊讶:be surprised at....

27、在高温下/在这么热的天:in this heat

28、玩的高兴:have a good time=have fun=enjoy oneself

29、戴围巾:wear scarfs

30、中央电视台世界各地节目:

CCTV's Around The World show

31、确实很舒适 :really very relaxed

32、弹吉他:play the guitar

16

七年级(下)复习资料(Unit7-12)

Unit7

1.short/curly/long/straight hair:短/卷/长/直发

2.medium height/build:中等高度/身材

3.look like:看起来象

4.the captain of the basketball team:篮球队队长

5.be a little bit quiet:有点儿少言寡语

6.stop doing sth.:停止做某事

7.like playing chess :喜欢下棋

8.wear glasses:戴眼镜

9.a pop singer:一个流行歌手

10.a new look:一个新的形象

11.black/brow/blonde hair:黑色/棕色/金黄色的头发

12.last month:上个月

13.a woman with long black hair:一个有着长长金发的妇女

Unit8

1.what kind of:哪一种

2.would like sth.:想要某东西

3.a small/medium/large bowl of noodles:小/中/大碗的面条

4.orange juice: 桔子汁

5.green tea:绿茶

6.a dumpling house/House of sumplings:一家饺子店

7.phone number:电话号码

8.tomato soup:西红柿汤

Unit9

1.do one’s homework:做家庭作业

2.play soccer:踢足球

3.clean one’s room:打扫某人的房间

4.go to the beach:去海滩

5.play tennis:打网球

6.go to the movies:去看电影

7.last weekend:上周末

8.do some reading:阅读

9.practice English:练习英语

10.study for the match test:为数学考试准备

11.last week :上周

12.on Saturday morning/ aternoon/ evening/ night:

在星期六的早晨/下午/晚上/深夜

13.an interesting talk show:一个有趣的谈话节目

14.go for a walk:去散步

15.a nice day:晴朗的一天

16.play with:与…一起玩

17.a busy weekend:一个繁忙的周末

18.look for:寻找

19.watch a movie:看电影

17

20.It’s time to do sth.:是做某事的时候了

Unit10

1.visit sb.拜访某人

2.summer camp:夏令营

3.visit museum:参观博物馆

4.on vacation:度假

5.great weather:好天气

6. all day/night/year:整天/夜/年

7.have great fun playing:玩得高兴

8.be crowded:拥挤

9.find sb. doing sth.:发现某人正在做某事

10.be lost:迷路

11.help sb.do sth.:帮助某人做某事

12.make sb. do sth.:使某人做某事

13.be tired:疲倦

14.decide to do sth.:决定做某事

15. The Great Wall:长城

Unit11

1.talk/game/spors show:谈话/游戏/体育节目

2.soap opera:肥皂剧;连续剧

3.situation comedy/sitcom:情景喜剧

4.don’t mind/like:不介意/喜欢

5.can’t stand:不能容忍

6.think of:认为 7.agree with sb.:同意某人意见

8.in fact:事实上;实际上

9.a thirteen-year-old boy:一个13岁的男孩

10.sports shows:体育节目 11.Animal World:动物世界

12.Tell it like it is!:实话实说

13.Culture China:中国文化

14.Chinese cooking:中国烹饪

15.key ring:钥匙链

16.ask sb. about sth:问某人关于某事

17.colorful clothes:颜色鲜艳的衣服

18. English Today:今日英语

19. Sports News:运动新闻

Unit12.

1.be late for class:上课迟到

2.listen to music:听音乐

3.have to :不得不

4.what else:别的什么

5.sports shoes:运动鞋

6.go out :出去

7.after school/class:放学/下课以后

8.What’s up ?:什么事?

9.chool magizine:校刊

10.I don’t .either.:我也不

11.on school nights:在学生有课的晚上

12.Children’s Palace:少年宫

18

13.chool/family rules:校/家规

14.make dinner:做饭 15.wear a uniform:穿制服

16.gym class:体育课

17.enjoy nice words about my looks:喜欢赞美自己的话

18.wash the clothes:洗衣服

新目标八年级(上)英语复习提纲(全套)

Unit 1: How often do you exercise?

. go to the movies 去看电影

2. look after = take care of 照顾

3. surf the internet 上网

4. healthy lifestyle 健康的生活方式

5. go skate boarding 去划板

6. keep healthy=stay healthy 保持健康

7. exercise=take(much)exercise=do sports锻炼

8. eating habits 饮食习惯

9. take more exercise 做更多的运动

10. the same as 与什么相同

11. be different from 不同

12. once a month一月一次

13. twice a week一周两次

14. make a difference to 对什么有影响

15. how often 多久一次

16. although = though虽然

17. most of the students=most students

18. shop=go shopping=do some shopping 购物

19. as for至于

20. activity survey活动调查

21. do homework做家庭作业

22. do house work做家务事

23. eat less meat吃更少的肉

24. junk food垃圾食物

25. be good for 对什么有益

26. be bad for对什么有害

27. want to do sth 想做某事

28. want sb to do sth想某人做某事

29. try to do sth 尽量做某事

30. come home from school放学回家

31. of course = certainly = sure当然

32. get good grades取得好成绩

33. some advice

34. hardly=not nearly / almost not几乎不

35. keep/be in good health保持健康

36.be stressed紧张的,有压力的

19

37. take a vacation 去度假

48.get back 回来

Unit 2 What’s the matter?

1. Have a cold 感冒

2. sore back 背痛

3. neck and neck 并驾齐驱,齐头并进

4. I have a stomachache 我胃痛

= I have got a stomachache

= There is something wrong with my stomach

= My stomach hurts

= I have (got) a pain in my stomach

5. What’s the matter? 怎么了?

= What’s the trouble (with you)?

= What’s your trouble?

= What’s wrong (with you)?

= What’ the matter (with you)?

=What has happened to you?

= Is there anything wrong (with you)? = what’s up?

6. sore throat 咽喉痛

7. lie down and rest 躺下休息

8. see a dentist 看牙医

9. drink lots of water 多喝水

10. hot tea with honey 加蜂蜜的热茶

11.That’s a good idea 好主意

12.That’s too bad 太糟糕了

13.I think so 我认为如此

14. I’m not feeling well. 我觉得不太舒服

= I’m not feeling fine/all right.

= I’m feeling ill/sick. =I feel terrible/bad.

= I don’t feel well.

15. get some rest 多休息

16. I have no idea = I don’t know 我不知道

17. stressed out 筋疲力尽

18. I am tired 我累了 He is tired. 他累了

19. a healthy lifestyle健康的生活方式

20. traditional Chinese doctors传统中医

21. a balance of yin and yang阴阳调和

22. you have too much yin.你阴气太盛

23. to eat a balance diet饮食平衡

24. healthy food 健康食品

25. stay healthy 保持健康

=keep healthy=keep in good health

= keep fit

26. enjoy oneself (myself, yourself, herself, himself, themselves, ourselves, itself

反身代词) 玩得高兴,过得愉快

20

=have a good time = have a wonderful time

= have fun

27. enjoy sth. =like sth. (名词)喜欢某物,

enjoy doing sth.喜欢做某事=like dong sth

practice doing sth.练习做某事,

mind doing sth. 介意做某事,

finish doing sth.完成某事,

give up doing sth.放弃做某事,

can’t help doing sth.忍不住做某事,

keep ding sth. 坚持做某事. (keep on doing sth. / keep sb. doing sth. )

be busy doing sth. 忙着做某事

be used to doing sth.习惯于做某事

make a contribution to doing sth.为..做贡献

go on doing sth. 继续做某事

forget doing sth.忘记做某事

remember doing sth. 记得做某事

spend....(in) doing sth. 花(时间)来做某事

prefer doing sth.to doing sth.比起(做...)来更愿意(做...)

28. at the moment = now 此刻

29. Host family 东道家庭

30. Conversation practice会话练习

31. I’m sorry to hear that.听到此事我很难过

Unit 3 What are you doing for vacation?

1. babysit one’s sister 照顾妹妹

2. visit one’s grandmother 看望奶奶

3. spend time with friends 和朋友们一起度过时光

4. visit cousins 看望表弟等

5. go to sports camp 去运动野营

6. o to the beach 去海滩

7. go camping 去野营

8. Go shopping 去买东西

9. go swimming 去游泳

10. go boating去划船

11. go skating 去溜冰

12. go walking去散步

13. go climbing 去登山

14. go dancing去跳舞

15. go hiking 去徒步远足

16. go sightseeing 去观光

17. go house-hunting 去找房子

18. o on a hike 徒步旅行,

go bike riding 骑自行车旅行,

go fishing 去钓鱼

19. do some shopping 买东西

20. do some washing 洗衣服

21

21. do some cooking 作饭

22. do some reading 读书

23. do some speaking训练口语

24. do some sewing 做缝纫活

25. that sounds nice 那好极了

26. at home 在家

27. how about=what about ……怎么样?

28. how long 多长时间

29. how far 多远

30. how often 多长时间一次

31. how much, how many 多少

32. have a good time

=have fun= have a wonderful time

= enjoy oneself 玩得高兴,过得愉快

33. show sb. Sth.=show sth. to sb.出示某物给某人看

give me the book=give the book to me 给我书,

pass me the cup=pass the cup to me 把杯子递给我, sell me the house=sell the house to me 把房子卖给我

buy me a book =buy a book for me 给我买书,

make me a cake = make a cake for me给我做蛋糕

34. get back=come back回来

35. rent videos租借影碟

36. take walks=go for a walk散步

37. think about 考虑

38. decide on= decide upon决定一个计划

39. something different 不同的事情

40.a great vacation 一个愉快的假期

41. I can’t wait 我等不及了

42. the famous movie star 著名的影星

43. an exciting vacation 激动人心的假期

44. Ask her about her plans 向她询问她的计划

ask sb. about sth.向某人询问某事

45. forget to do sth. 忘记要做某事

forget doing sth. 忘记做过某事

Unit 4 How do you get to school?

1. get to school 到校

2. get home 到家

3. how about=what about …….怎么样?

4. take the subway 乘地铁

5. ride a bike 骑自行车

6. take the bus乘公共汽车

7. take the train乘火车

8. take a taxi乘坐出租车

9. go in a parent’s car 坐父母的车

10. by bike, bike bus, by subway, by taxi, by car, by train 22

(乘坐……车,放在句尾)

11. have a quick breakfast 迅速吃早饭

12. the early bus 早班车 13. how far多远

14. take sb. to sp.带某人到某处

15. doing sth. takes sb. Some time/ money

=It takes sb. some time/money to do sth.

=sb. spends some time/money (on sth.)

=sb. spends some time/money (in) doing sth.

=sth. costs sb. some time/money

=sb. pay some money for sth.

花费某人多少时间/金钱做某事/某人花费多少金钱/时间做某事

16. bus stop公共汽车站,train station火车站,

subway station地铁站,bus station客运站

17. want to do sth.想做某事

18. walk to school 步行上学

19. in North America 在北美

20. in other parts of the world 在世界的其他地区

21. depend on=depend upon 依靠,靠……决定

22. not all 不是所有的

23. need to do sth.需要做某事

24. number of students学生数

25. a number of=many 许多

number前可用large, great, small修饰其谓语是复数

26. the number of….的数量,谓语是单数

27. don’t worry(about sth./sb.)别着急(为某人/事担心

28. around the world= all over the world世界各地,全世界

Unit 5 Can you come to my party?

1. come to one’s party 参加某人的聚会

2. on Saturday afternoon 在星期六的下午

3. I’d love to 我非常乐意

4. I’m sorry 对不起

5. study for a test为测验而学习

6. go to the doctor 去看医生

7. visit one’s aunt 看望某人的姑姑

8. have a piano lesson 上一堂钢琴课

10. too much homework 太多家庭作业

11. much too interesting 有趣得多

12. maybe another time 也许下一次吧

13.Thanks for asking(inviting)谢谢邀请

14. go to the baseball game 参加棒球比赛

15. Birthday Party 生日聚会

16. go to the mall 去购物中心

17. soccer practice 足球练习

18. look for 寻找

19. find out 找到,弄清楚,查明

23

20. study for the math test 为数学考试而学习

21. play tennis with me 和我一起打网球

22. I have a really busy week 我一周很忙

23. football match足球比赛

24. my cousin’s birthday party 我表弟的生日聚会

25. write soon 尽快回信

26. study for my science test 为科学考试而学习

27. 给某人打电话的几种说法:

call sb. up, call sb.

phone sb., phone to sb.

telephone sb. telephone to sb.

phone sb. up,ring sb.

give sb. a ring,

give sb. a phone

make a telephone call to sb.

28. on Thursday night 星期四晚上

29. be (go) on vacation 度假

30. next week下周

31. join sb.加入某人一起

32. Please keep quiet! 请保持安静,

keep+形容词表示“保持某种状态”,

keep+(sb.)+doing 表示“(使某人)不停地做某事”, keep sth. 保存某物

34. culture club 文化俱乐部

35. try to do sth. 努力(企图)做某事,

try doing sth.试着做某事,try one’ best to do sth. 尽力做某事

unit 6 I’m more outgoing than my sister.

1. long hair 长头发

2. How are you? 你身体好吗?

3. How old 多大年纪4. how tall 多高

5. how long ago多久前(的事)

6.more outgoing 比较外向

7. want/plan to do sth. 意欲,企图

8. here are photos of me 这是我的照片

9. as you can see 正如你所看到的

10. in some ways在某些地方

11. we look the same我们看起来一样,

They look different他们看起来不同

12. the same to ……多……是一样的

13. quite the same 完全一样

14. all the same 还是, 同样应……

15. look like 看起来像….一样,而look same 看起来很像

16. go to lots of parties经常参加聚会=often go to the party

17. a little taller 高一点

18. take sth. from sth. 从某处拿/取出某物

24

19. put sth. in sth. 将某物放入某物中

20. make a list of 列出清单

21. has cool clothes 有漂亮的衣服

22. is popular in school 在学校受欢迎

23. is good at sports 擅长体育

24. make me laugh 使我发笑

25. that’s not very important for me 那对我来说并不重要 ( be important for sb.)

26. put up举起,抬起,挂起,张贴,建造;

put on穿上,戴上,上演(戏剧);

put down=write down=copy down 写下来;

put out 伸出,扑灭;

put away 收起来,收好;

put off推迟;

put one’s heart into…全神贯注于……,全身心投入……

27. opposite views 相反的观点

28. a weekend teacher 周末教师

29. Abacus Study Center 珠算研究中心

30. elementary school students 小学生

31. be good with children 善于与孩子相处

32. have good grades 成绩出色

33. enjoy telling jokes 喜欢讲笑话

34. can’t stop talking 不能停止讲话

35. help others 帮助别人,help each other互相帮助

36. in one’s free time在业余时间

37. one of +复数名词(代词)……其中之一

38. use sth. to do sth.=do sth.. with sth. 使用…做…

39. be/feel sorry for sb. 为某事感到同情或难受;

be / feel sorry for sth. 因某事感到抱歉或后悔;

be sorry +to see/hear 听到或看到某种情况很不安或难过;

say sorry to sb.向某人道歉

40. begin with 从……开始

41. next to 在……旁边,紧靠……

42. be famous for 因… 而著名,因……而广为人知;

be famous as 作为……而知名

43. all together 总计,总共

44. make sb. do sth. 让/使某人做某事,

相似的用法有几个感官动词see, let, hear, watch, feel等

Unit 7 How do you make a banana milk smoothie?

1. make a banana smoothie 制作香蕉混合饮料(思木西)

2. peel the bananas 剥香蕉

3. cut up the bananas切碎香蕉

4. pour the milk in the blender 将牛奶倒入搅拌器

5. turn on the blender 打开搅拌器电源

6. put the yogurt in the blender将酸奶放入搅拌器

25

7. turn off 关上,(turn on 打开)

turn up旋大(灯火等),开大(煤气等)调高(声音等), turn down 把(灯火、电器等)关小一点

8. how much cinnamon多少肉桂

9. one teaspoon of cinnamon 一茶匙肉桂

10. make fruit salad 制作水果沙拉

11. two pieces of bread 两片面包

12. mix it all up 将它们混合在一起

14. turkey slices 火鸡肉片, a slice of bread一片面包

13. takes turns doing sth,

take turns to do sth.=do sth. in turns 轮流做某事

15. slices of duck 烤鸭片

16. roll pancake 卷上薄饼

17. make faces 作鬼脸

make friends with 与……交朋友

make a noise吵闹, make mistakes犯错误,

make the bed整理床铺

make one’s way to往…走去,

make room for给…腾出地方

18. it’s easy to do sth. 做某事容易

it’s hard (difficult) to do sth.做某事难,

It’s necessary to do sth.做某事必要

19. put sth, in order 将某些东西按顺序排列

20. a recipe for ……的烹调方法, ……的

Unit 8 How was your school trip?

1. talk about 谈论,talk over谈论

2. give a talk 作报告

3. have a talk to (with) sb.与某人谈话

4. go to the beach去海滩

5. have ice cream吃冰淇淋

6. go to the zoo去动物园

7. go to the aquarium去水族馆

8. hang out with one’s friends和朋友闲逛

9. take photos=take a photo=take pictures=take a picture照相

10. buy a souvenir买纪念品

11. have pizza吃比萨饼

12. a famous actor著名的演员

13. get one’s autograph得到了某人的亲笔签名

14. win a prize赢得奖品(奖项)

15. at the aquarium 在水族馆

16. have a great time玩得高兴,过得愉快

17. on the school trip在学校的旅游

18. Blue Water Aquarium蓝色水族馆

19. the Visitors’ Center游客中心

20.a dolphin show海豚表演

26

21. after that 后来

22. at the end of…在……结束的时候,在……的尽头

23. the Gift Shop礼品店

24. at the beginning of…在..开始的时候

25. a terrible school trip糟糕的学校旅行

26. that sounds interesting那听起来很有趣

27. make up a story编一个故事

28. go for a drive 开车兜风

30. in the rain在雨中

in the dark在黑暗中\

in the sun在阳光下

in the snow在雪中

31. take notes of=write down=copy down 写下,记下

32. have fun doing sth.很快乐的做某事

33. play computer games打电脑游戏

34. for sale 供销售

35. see you soon盼望很快见到你

36. in one’s opinion据某人看来,某人的观点上看

37. win the first prize获得了一等奖

38.a famous basketball player著名的篮球运动员

39. in the future在将来,今后

40. can’t help doing sth.忍不住做某事

41. the story goes that…据说……

42. a busy day off 繁忙的假日,

in one’s off hours在某人的休息时间

the off season淡季

43. none of… ……当中没有一个

44. a heavy rain 一阵大雨

a light rain一阵小雨

a fine rain 一阵细雨

44. all day = all day long 整天

all night = all night long整夜

Unit 9 When was he born?

1. ping-pong player乒乓球运动员

2. a great Chinese ping-pong player中国杰出的乒乓球运动员

3. start hiccupping 开始打嗝

4. too… to…太……,而不……

5. write music谱写曲子

6. a movie star电影明星

7. learn to ride a bicycle学会骑自行车

8. start learning开始学英语

9. begin playing sports 开始进行体育运动

10. a loving grandfather慈爱的祖父

11. spend all one’s free time with sb.与某人一起度过了所有的业余时间

12. a famous violinist 著名的小提琴手

27

13. ice skating滑冰

14. a kind and loving grandmother和蔼而慈爱的祖母

15. a skating champion 滑冰冠军

16. the famous Chinese pianist中国著名的钢琴演奏家

17. a small boy(girl)孩提时期

18. at the age of…在……年龄时

19. take part in参加、加入

20. begin to learn the accordion开始学习手风琴

21. major in 主修,专修

22. start for a place=leave for a place动身去…

23. because of 因为、由于

unit 10 I’m going to be a basketball player

1. grow up 长大,成长

2. computer science计算机科学

3. be going to do 表示主观打算、准备或有信心做某事

4. computer programmer 电脑程序设计人

5. baseball player 棒球运动员

6. take acting lessons上演技课

7. professional basketball player职业篮球运动员

8. practice basketball练习篮球

9. move somewhere=move to somewhere搬到(不具体的)某一地方

10. sound like 听起来像……

11. part-time 兼职的,full-time 全职的,全日制的

12. a year or two 一两年=one or two years;

an hour or two=one or two hours一两个小时

a day or two=one or two days一两天

13. my dream job我梦想的工作

14. what I want to do 我想做的事情

15. somewhere interesting有趣的地方

16. a reporter for fashion magazine 时装杂志记者

17. save some money 积蓄一些钱,攒钱

18. at the same time与此同时

19. hold art exhibition举办美术展览

20. all over the world全世界,世界各地

21. somewhere quiet and beautiful 安静而美丽的地方

22. send sth. to sb. 将某物发送给某人

23. I’m not sure yet我还没有定下来

24. the Olympic Games=the Olympics奥运会

25. New Year’s resolutions新年的决心

26. play an instrument 弹一种乐器

27. get a part-time job找到一份兼职工作

28. make the soccer team组建足球队

29. get good grades获得好成绩

30. eat healthier food吃健康的食物

31. get lots of exercise多进行体育锻炼

28

32. take guitar lessons上吉他课

33. I really love music我酷爱音乐

34. sounds interesting听起来很有意思

35. communicate with sb.与某人交流

36. a foreign language teacher 一份当外语教师的工作

37. keep fit 保持身体健康

38. work harder in school 在学校里更努力学习

39. make one’s resolution 表决心

40. after high school=leave school中学毕业后

41. international magazines 国际杂志社

42. the exchange students留学生

43. have a welcome party 召开一个欢迎会

Unit 11 Could you please clean your room?

1. could you please…你能……吗?/请你干…….好吗?

2. do the dishes 洗餐具

3. sweep the floor清扫地板

4. take out the trash倒垃圾

5. make one’s bed铺床

6. fold one’s clothes叠衣服

7. clean the living room 清扫客厅

8. stay out late晚归

9. his father’s reason他父亲的理由

10. get a ride搭车

11. use one’s computer 使用某人的电脑

12. hate sth./to do sth.讨厌某事/做某事

13. do the laundry=do some washing=wash clothes洗衣服

14. make breakfast, make dinner, do some cooking 做饭

15. wash the car刷车16. work on 从事,忙于

17. work at学习、致力于、在……上下工夫

18. borrow some money借一些钱

19. invite sb. to do sth邀请某人做某事

20. go to the store去商店

21.agree sb. to do sth.同意某人做某事

22. agree with sb. =agree with what one says同意某人的意见

23.(需了解) make a deal作成交易

make a face做鬼脸;

make a fool of捉弄,使出洋相

make friends with与……交朋友

make a name for himself成名

make a note of注意,记下来

make free with擅自使用

make fun of取笑

make…into把……作成,使变成

make it成功,到达某处

make one’s living维持生活

29

make one’s way to前往某处

make room腾出地方

make up编造

make use of利用

24. borrow sth. from sb.向某人借某物(借入)

25. lend sb. sth.=lend sth. to sb.借给某人某物(借出)

26.ask for要求得到、要求见到

27. take care of = look after照顾、照看、照料

take good care of=look after…well

28. need some help需要一些帮助

29. come over过来

30. get angry生气

31. have a test考试

32. make a clean sweep of 彻底扫除

Unit 12 what’s the best radio station?

1. the best radio station最好的无线电台

2. comfortable seats舒适的椅子

3. big screens大屏幕

4. friendly service友好的服务

5. new movies新电影

6. close to home离家近

7. in a fun part of town 在城镇闹区

8. Town Cinema城镇电影院

9. Screen City大屏幕影视城

10. Movie Palace电影艺术宫

11. Jeans Corner牛仔广角

12.Trendy Teens时髦少年服装店

13. Easy Listening轻松听力

14. have good quality clothes服装质量好

15. in town在城里, in the city在城市里

in the country在乡下

16. the beat clothing store最好的服装店

17. do a survey of 对…进行调查

18. all the movie theaters所有的电影院

19. the most interesting music最有趣的音乐

20.be(get, become, feel) interested in 对…感兴趣

21.positive words肯定的词语

22. negative words否定的词语

23. the most creative最有创造力的

24. the most boring最烦人的

25. the math teacher数学老师

26. a great success巨大的成功

27. win the prize for赢得……的奖项

28. without music没有音乐伴奏下

29. the funniest actor最滑稽的演员

30

30. the worst movie最差的电影

31. action movies动作片

32. beautiful beaches美丽的海滩

33. in the north of China在中国的北部

34. an Ice and Snow Festival冰雪节

35. Central Park 中心公园

36. leader of a band乐队指挥

37. Forbidden City紫禁城

38.elementary school

新目标八年级英语(上)期末复习手册

? 句子 Unit1-12重点知识梳理 Unit 1

1.问频率 1.How often do you exercise?

Once a day.

2. What does she usually do on weekends?

She usually watches TV.

3. How many hours do you sleep?

Nine hours. ? 核心知识

1.表频率副词:always, usually, often, sometimes, hardly ever, never.

2. once a week 一周一次,

twice a year 一年两次

three times a week 一周三次

four times a month 一个月四次

3. all, most , some , no

4. be good for sth./ doing sth. 对什么有益

be bad for sth. /doing sth. 对什么有害

5. want to do sth. 想要做某事

want sb. to do sth. 要某人做某事

6. as for至于 7.try to do sth. 尽量做某事

8. of course = certainly = sure当然

9. look after = take care of 照顾

10. keep healthy=stay healthy 保持健康

11. exercise=take exercise=do sports锻炼

12. although == though虽然

13. be the same as 与什么相同

be different from 不同

14. how often 多久一次

15. most of the students=most students

16. get good grades取得好成绩

17. some advice 中的advice是不可数名词

18. keep/be in good health保持健康

31

19.shop=go shopping=do some shopping购物

20. surf the internet 上网

21. a lot of == lots of 许多

22. health n., healthy adj. ,

healthily adv. , unhealthy adj.

? 23. different adj. difference n. 可数

熟读

P1 1b , P 2 2a G.F, P3 3 , P5 3a 3b

? Unit 2

句子

1. 看病用语

①What’s the matter(with sb.)? 怎么了?

= What’s the trouble (with sb.)?

= What’s wrong (with sb.)?

= Is there anything wrong (with sb.)?

②I’m not feeling well. 我觉得不太舒服

= I’m feeling ill/sick. =I feel terrible/bad.

= I don’t feel well

③I have a stomachache 我胃痛

= I have got a stomachache

= There is something wrong with my stomach

= My stomach hurts

= I have (got) a pain in my stomach

④ When did it start? 什么时候开始的?

⑤ You should drink more water. 表建议

You shouldn’t eat more.

2. That’s a good idea 好主意

That’s too bad 太糟糕了

3. I have no idea = I don’t know 我不知道 ?4. I’m sorry to hear that.听到此事我很难过

核心知识

1.身体各部位名称P7 1a

2. 情态动词 should 与shouldn’t 表建议

3. have a cold / stomachache / toothache /

fever/ sore throat

4. see a dentist / doctor 5. soon 一会儿

6. feel 觉得,get 变, stay 保持, keep 保持,

sound 听起来是系动词 常和形容词连用 如:feel happy , get tired,

7. lie down 躺下 8. for example 例如

9. too much 太多+不可数名词,

too many 太多+可数名词,

much too 太+形容词

10. stressed out压抑 筋疲力尽

32 stay / keep healthy

11. it’s +形容词+ to do sth. 做某事怎么样

12. a few 一些 修饰可数名词

a little 一些 修饰不可数名词

few 少许 修饰可数名词 表否定

little 少许 修饰不可数名词 表否定

13. at the moment = now 此刻 常和现在进行时连用

14. neck and neck 并驾齐驱,齐头并进

15. I think so 我认为如此

16. tooth n . 复数形式teeth ? 熟读 P7 1a , P8 , P9 3a ,

P10 1a 形 1b 建议 , P11 4 , P12 2 ? 写作 看病

Unit 3 ? 句子

1. What are you doing for vacation?

I’m visiting my grandmother.

2. When are you doing?

I’m going on Monday.

3.That sounds nice / interesting.

4. 问多长时间 How long are you staying?

For four days.

5.Can I ask you some questions? ? 核心知识

1. 现在进行时表一般将来时 常用的动词有: is / am / are going

is / am / are leaving

is / am / are coming

2. take walks == go for a walk散步

3. some 一些, any 一些 4. sing v.—singer n.

5. take a vacation=take vacations=go on vacation

6. think about考虑 7. something different

8. plan to do sth.计划做某事 9. spend time

10. finish doing 完成做某事 11. a lot 许多

12. need to do sth.需要做某事

13. go camping 去野营 go shopping 去买东西 go swimming 去游泳 go boating去划船 go skating 去溜冰 go walking去散步 go climbing 去登山 go fishing 去钓鱼 go hiking 去徒步远足 go dancing去跳舞 go sightseeing 去观光

14. do some shopping 买东西

do some washing 洗衣服

do some cooking 做饭

do some reading 读书

do some speaking训练口语

33

15.. how about=what about ……怎么样?

16. go back , come back , get back 回来

17. tour n.—tourist n. ? 写作 P17 3a 假期计划 ? 熟读 P14 GF , P15 3a , P16 1a , P 17 3a

Unit 4 ? 句子

1. How do you get to school? I ride my bike.

2. How does he get to school?

He takes the train.

3. 问多长时间How long does it take?

It takes about 10 minutes.

4. 问路程 How far is it ?

How far is it from home to school? It is about 10 kilometers.

5. Don’t worry. ? 核心知识

1. by bike, by bus, by subway, by taxi,

by boat, by car, by train

(乘坐??车,放在句尾)

2. take the taxi / train / bus/ subway / car

3. ride a bike 骑自行车

4. walk to+地点 走到…

5. have a quick breakfast

6. how long 多长时间 how far 多远 how often 多长时间一次

how much, how many 多少

7. get to school 到校 get home/there /here get to == arrive in /at == reach 到达

8. leave for 离开去… 9. first , next , then

10. depend on 依靠,靠??决定

11. around the world= all over the world全世界

12. take sb. to +地点 把某人送到某地

It takes sb. some time/money to do sth.

花费某人多少时间/金钱做某事

take 可译为:花费、送(带)、搭 ? 熟读 P20 2c 2d G.F. ,

P21 3a 3b , P23 3a , P24 2

Unit 5 ? 句子

邀请用语

1. Can you come to my party?

=Would you like to come to my party?

肯定回答:Sure , I’d love to .

34

否定回答:I’m sorry. I can’t. I have to do

my homework.

2. Maybe another time.

3. Thanks for asking(inviting)谢谢邀请 问星期What is today? It is Monday? What day is it today? It is Monday. ? 核心知识

1.情态动词 can 与can’t

2. I’d love to 我非常乐意

3. I’m sorry 对不起 4. write soon 尽快回信

5. would like sth. 想要某物

would like (love )to do sth.

想要做某事 愿意做某事

6. have a piano lesson 上一堂钢琴课

7. keep quiet! 请保持安静,

keep+形容词 表示“保持某种状态”

8. the day after tomorrow 后天

the day before yesterday 前天

9. invite v.—invitation n. 邀请 ? 写作 P29 3a 关于拒绝邀请的回信 ? 熟读 P25 1a 1c , P26 2b 2c G.F ,

P27 4 , P29 3a 3b 4

Unit 6

? 句子

1. Tina is taller than Paul.

2. Tom is more athletic than Sam

? 核心知识

1. 形容词副词的比较级、最高级

2. as …as 与…一样,

not as /so…as 与…不一样

3. look the same我们看起来一样

4. both :be+both , both+实义动词

5. a little, much , even, far 可修饰比较级

6. be good at sth./ doing sth. 擅长于…

7. make sb. do 使某人做某事

8. be important for sb. 对某人来说很重要

9. in some ways在某些地方

10. more than== over 超过

? 熟读 P32 G.F, P33 3a , P35 3a ? 写作 P33 3a 描写人物

Unit7

? 句子

How do you make a banana milk shake? 问数量

35

1.How many bananas do we need ? We need 5.

2.How much yogurt do we need? One cup. ? 核心知识

1. 量词 a cup of , a bottle of , a piece of ,

a bowl of , a pair of , a box of ,

a slice of , a teaspoon of

2. 连词 first , next , then , finally

3. turn on 打开, turn off 关上,

turn down 关小

4. cut up切碎 5. mix up 混合

6. add …to … 把…加到…上

? 熟读

P41 1b , P42 2c G.F. , P 43 3a , P45 3a ? 写作 写一篇制作食物的步骤

Unit8

? 句子

1. Did you go to the zoo? Yes, I did. No, I didn’t.

2. Were there any sharks?

Yes, there were. No, there weren’t.

3. What else did you do ?你还做了些什么? ? 核心知识

一般过去时

1. hang out 闲荡 2. have a good time

3. late adj. / adv. 迟 4. take a class 上课

5. luck n. lucky adj. luckily adv.

6. see you soon 盼望很快见到你

7. in the future

8. at the end of …在…的最后

9. have fun doing sth. 做某事很有趣

10. go for a drive 开车兜风

11. visit v.参观 — visitor n. 参观者 ? 写作 P49 3a 和P51 3a

记叙一天所做的事

? 熟读 P47 1b , P48 2b G.F. ,

P 49 3a , P51 3a

Unit9

? 句子

1.When was he born ? He was born in 1895

2. How long did he hiccup? For 5days.

3. When did he start hiccupping?

He started hiccupping in 1922.

? 核心知识

一般过去时

1. be born 出生

2. start doing ==start to do 开始做某事 36

begin doing== begin to do

3. too…to 太…而不能做某事

4. violinist小提琴家 , violin 小提琴

pianist 钢琴家,piano 钢琴

5. well—known adj. 著名的

6. at the age of …在…岁

7. take part in 参加 某种活动、比赛、项目 join 参加 某个组织 成为其中一员

8. because of+名词 因为

9. 70—year adj. 70年的

10. usual adj. 寻常的 unusual adj. 不寻常的 ? 写作 P55 3a 和P57 3a 描写人物 ? 熟读 P53 1b, P54 2c G.F,

P55 3a , P56 2b 2c , P57 3a

Unit 10

? 句子

1. What are you going to do when you grow up? I’m going to be an actor.

2. How are you going to do that?

I’m going to take acting lesson.

? 核心知识

1. be going to 是一般将来时

①表将要发生的动作或存在的状态

②常和将来的时间连用 如:

next day/week/ month / year …

in the future , in 20 years , tomorrow,

the day after tomorrow 等

2. grow up长大

3. at the same time 同时

4. read v.—reader n.读者

5. somewhere interesting 有趣的地方

6. save money 存钱

7. maybe 也许

8. get good grades 取得好成绩

9. keep fit ==keep healthy

10. 时间状语从句 由when , after , before , as soon as , not…until , while , since 等词引导 注:当主句是一般将来时,从句用一般现在时 I will be a teacher when I grow up. ? 写作 P61 3a 如何实现自己的梦想 ? 熟读 P59 1b 1c , P60 GF. , P 61 3a 3b,

P62 1a 1b , P63 3a

37

Unit 11

? 句子

表请求句子以及回答

1. Could you please sweep the floor?

Yes, sure. Sorry, I can’t. I have to go out.

2. Could I please go to the movies?

Yes, you can. No, you can’t . I have to go out. ? 核心知识

1.could you please…你能?吗?/请你干?.好吗?

2. need to do sth.

3. hate doing / to do sth.讨厌做某事

4. do the dishes 洗餐具

5. sweep the floor清扫地板

6. stay out late晚归

7. make one’s bed铺床

8. fold one’s clothes叠衣服

9. take out the trash倒垃圾

10. invite sb. to do./ somewhere

邀请某人做某事/到某地

11. take care of ==look after 照顾

12. forget to do 忘记去做某事

13. help n. 不可数 help v.

14. have a test 休息

15. borrow sth. from sb.向某人借某物(借入)

16. agree 同意 disagree 不同意

? 写作 P69 3a 请求帮助的信

? 熟读 P65 1a 1b , P66 2c G.F. ,

P67 3a 4 , P68 1a , P69 3a

Unit 12

? 句子

1. What is the best clothing store ? Jason’s.

? 核心知识

1. 形容词、副词的比较级和最高级

2. love v. 喜爱 lovely adj.美好的,令人愉快的

3. south n—southern adj.

north n.—northern adj.

east n.—eastern adj.

west n. —western adj.

4. close to 靠近 接近

5. music n. musician n. musical adj.

6. lead v. 指挥,指导 leader n.主唱人 指挥者 ? 写作 P76 2 介绍一个旅游景点

? 熟读 P71 1b , P72 2c G.F, P73 3a ,

P75 3a , P76 2

38

新目标八年级英语(下)期末复习手册

Unit1-15重点知识梳理

◆unit 1 Will people have robots?

目标语言:Make predictions

重点句型:People won’t use money. Everything will be free.

Books will only be on computers, not on paper.

Kids won’t go to school. They’ll study at home on computer.

There will only be one country.

People will live to be 200 years old.

Will people use money in 100 years? No, they won’t.

There will be more people.

There will be less free time.

There will be fewer cars.

There will be less pollution.

There will be fewer trees.

I agree.

What do you think Sally will be in five years?

I think she will be a doctor.

Where do you live? I live in an apartment.

知识点:

1.形容词,副词的比较等级考查热点透视:

a) 表示A与B在程度上相同时, “as+形容词或副词的原级+as”结构。表示A不如B时,可用“not as/so+形容词或副词的原级+as”结构。

b) 表示A比B在程度上“更…..”时,可用“形容词或副词的比较级+than”结构 c) 表示三者或三者以上的比较,其中一个在程度上“最…..”时,常用“the+形容词或副词的最高级”结构,后面可带“of/in的短语”来说明比较的范围。(注意:副词的最高级在句中常省略“the”.)

d) 在形容词或副词的比较级前,可以用“a little, even, far, much,still”的等词语来修饰,以加强语气。

e) 表示“越来越….”时,常用“形容词或副词的比较级+and+形容词或副词的比较级”结构,但要注意,对于多音节和部分双音节形容词,副词而言,若要表达此意时,要用“more and more+形容词或副词的原级“结构。

f) 在表示“其中最….之一“的含义时,常使用 “one of+the+形容词最高级形式+名词复数”结构,其中的定冠词the不可以省略。

g) 如果强调“两者中比较…的(一个)”的意思时,可使用“the+形容词比较级+其它”结构。

h) 表示“越….越….”, 可使用“the+形容词或副词的比较级,the+形容词或副词的比较级”结构。

2.几个相似的“It句型”

a) It’s +adj.+ that从句:在该句型中,it代替that从句,形容词用来说明that从句内容的性质。如,It’s polite that you always give seats to the elderly on the bus.

b) It’s +adj.+to do sth.在该句型中,it代替to do sth的内容,形容词用来说明to do sth的性质。如,It’s useful to remember lots of words before the exams.

c) It’s +adj.+for sb. to do sth.在该句型中,it代替to do sth的内容,形容词用来强调 39

to do sth就sb而言的性质(常见的形容词有possible, important, necessary, difficult)

d) It’s +adj.+of sb. to do sth.在该句型中,it代替to do sth.的内容,形容词用来强调of后所接宾语本身的性质(常见的形容词有kind, rude, clever, foolish, polite).

3.一般将来时

a) 一般将来时的构成:由助动词shall或will加动词原形构成,shall用于第一人称。在口语中,will在名词或代词后常简略为’ll, will not常简略为won’t。这个时态的肯定,

用”be going to +动词原形”也可表示将来时,表示将要发生的事,打算或决定要做的事。 I think it is going to snow.我看要下雪。

b)一般将来时的用法:1)表示将要发生的动作或情况;2) 不以人的意志为转移,肯定要发生的事情。The day after tomorrow will be National Day.后天是国庆日。

4. in/after:in是指以现在时间为起点的“在一段时间以后”。也可以表示“在将来多少时间之内”,句子中的谓语动词要用一般将来时态;after常指以过去时间为起点的“一段时间之后”,所以它与过去时态连用。当after指某个特定的未来时刻或日期之后,或指以将来某一时间为起点的若干时间之后时,它可以与将来时态连用。

5.more, less, fewer的用法区别:more为many, much的比较级,意为“更多”,可修饰可数与不可数名词。Less是little的比较级,意为“更好,较少”,修饰不可数名词。Fewer是few的比较级,意为“更少”,修饰可数名词复数。

【注意】few, little表示否定“几乎没有”。a few, a little表示肯定“一点,几个”。如, Because he often stays at home, he has few friends.

6.there be与have的区别:1)含义不同。there be表示的是“某地(时)有某人(物)”,强调“存在关系”。Have则表示“某人(物)所有”,强调“所属关系”。如,

There is a bus in your factory.(公共汽车不一定属于我们厂所有)

Our factory has a bus.(公共汽车属于我们厂所有)

2)句型不同。there be句型为“There be +某人(物)+某时(地)”;have 句型为“某人(物)+have(has)+某物(人)。如There isn’t a cat under the chair. She doesn’t have two brothers.

3)当表示某物的构成和组成部分时,用there be和have 均可。如,Our school has sixty classes.= There are sixty classes in our school.我们学校有60个班。

【注意】there be句型中有两个或多个并列主语时,须根据就近原则,be与最靠近的主语在数上保持一致。如,There are two eggs and a cup of milk on the table.

There be句型的将来时表达方式:肯定:There will be…否定:There won’t be…一般疑问句:Will there be….? Yes, there will. No, there won’t.

7. be worth doing值得;be worthy of doing, be worthy to do值得

8.Seem的用法:1)seem to do似乎…He seems to think so.2)It seems that看来…It seems that he is lying. 3) seem +adj./n.好象是… He seems ill.

9.would like sth意思为“想要某物“; would like to do意思为”想要做某事“。回答would like句型的一般疑问句时,其肯定回答为 “Yes, please.”;否定回答“No, thanks”或 “I’d like /love to, but….”

10.make sb. do; make +n+adj.; make friends with sb.; make +n./ pron.+n.

40

11. Such作形容词,意思是“如此的”“这样的”,修饰各种名词。

? Such这样的。如It is such bad weather.天气如此恶劣。

? Such常和as搭配,表示一种类别。如We enjoy such a voice as hers.我们喜欢象她那样的嗓子。

? Such常和表示结果的that从句搭配,表示“如此….以至于…”如

It was such a hot day that we all had to stay at home.

? Such…that…和so…that…都可用来引出一个结果状语从句。由于such是形容词,所以that从句前有一个受such修饰的名词;而so 是副词,用以修饰形容词或副词,因此that从句前一般不出现名词。如

They are such kind-hearted teachers that people in the village all respect them.

The exam was so difficult that many students failed to pass it.

a) 如果名词是可数名词的单数形式,such和so的位置不同:

such+a/an+形容词+单数名词

so+形容词+a/an+单数名词

b) 如果名词是不可数名词或名词复数,只可用such,不能用so.:

such+形容词+不可数名词或复数名词

c) 如果被修饰的不可数名词被much, little, 或复数名词被many, few等表示量的形容词修饰时,用so,不用such.

d) 当little表示“年纪小的”时,可用such+little+名词

There were such little children that they couldn’t clean the room.

12. people, person, folks, human: people“人们“全体;person “人”(不分年龄,性别它包括men, women, children.它可做people的单数形式可以说every person但不能说one people. Person指“人们”时着重个体;folks“人们”,指一般人或特殊年龄位置,境遇等特殊级的人;human主要用来区别于其他动物。

13.be able to 为“能,会”,表示能力,在这个意义上与can的意思相同,一般情况下两者可以互换,但can只有现在式和过去式(could)而be able to则用于更多的时态,主要体现在be的变化。两者在用法上有一些差异:can (could)表示主观能力不表示意愿,它的将来时用will be able to而 be able to表示主观意愿强调克服困难做某事。

14.Fee-fed-fed. Feed sth to sb把…食物给…;feed sb on sth

15可数名词复数的构成有如下规则:

①一般加-s,如:desk→desks

② s, x, ch, sh结尾加-es,如:bus→buses, watch→watches

③以 f, fe结尾,改f, fe为v,再加-es,如:leaf→leaves

④以“辅音字母+y”结尾,改y为i,再加-es,如city→cities

⑤以“辅音字母+o”结尾,加-es,如:tomato →tomatoes

⑥一般复合名词,只将主体名词变复数,如: boy student→boy students ⑦以 man, woman开头和结尾的复合名词,规则不同:

Frenchman→Frenchmen, woman teacher→women teachers

⑧不规则变化: foot→feet, child→children

单、复数同形的情况:sheep→sheep, Chinese→Chinese(中国人)

只有复数形式的情况: people, clothes, trousers

需要背诵的是:第6页的3a

◆unit 2 What should I do?

目标语言: talk about problems and give advice

41

重点句型:P10-1a;P11-2a and 2b; P12-3a ,3b and 4;P13-1a and2a

需要背诵的是第12页的3a和第14页的3a

知识点:

1.argue with sb about sth.与某人辩论某事

2..loud是形容词,loud-louder-loudest意思是“响亮的”;作副词时,常与talk, sing, laugh 等词连用,如speak loud; loudly “大声地”带有喧闹的意味,常用来修饰shout, cry, call, knock等动词,通常没有比较级和最高级,作状语;aloud 副词,出声地,大声地,仅指发出声音(以使能被听得见)。

3.Enough为形容词,意思是“足够的”;enough +n.修饰名词enough money; adj/adv+enough修饰形容词或副词;enough to do 足够做某事

4.call sb up给某人打电话 = give sb a call ; call sb ; ring sb up; phone sb;

write sb a letter= write a letter to sb. 给某人写信;write to sb写给某人;get/receive a letter from sb.收到某人的来信

5.give sb sth=give sth to sb把某物给某人。当 sb. sth都为代词时只能用give sth to sb

6.present, gift礼物:gift带有一定的感情色彩,通常指昂贵的“礼物”,强调送礼人的诚意,有时有“捐赠”之意,多用于正式场合;present指为表达情谊,敬意或出于礼节,在某特定时刻或场合赠送的“礼物”,此礼物价值不一定高。make sb a present of把…作为礼物送给

7.borrow, lend: borrow“借入,借给”即说话人向他人借东西borrow sth from sb.; lend-lent-lent“借出,借给”即说话人把自己的东西借给他人lend sb sth= lend sth to sb

8. join sb in sth; join sb in doing sth与…一起(做某事);join…to …把…和…连接起来 9 except,besides除…之外: except除了…都,besides强调“除了…之外还有…”在no one, nobody, nothing等词后加介词but也表示“除了”。

10.find out, find, look for: find out“找出,发现,查明”多指通过调查,询问,打听,研究之后搞清楚,弄明白或指找出较难找到的,无形的抽象的东西;find“找到,发现”通常指找到或发现有形的东西也可指偶然发现某物的某种情况,强调找的结果;look for“寻找”强调动作。

11.talk about谈到,谈论;talk of谈到,说到;have a talk with与..谈谈,做报告;talk to sb对…谈话;talk with sb与…交谈;talk to sb和talk with sb 均表示“和某人谈话”,“讲话”。talk to sb比较常用,侧重一方谈,一方听;talk with sb侧重双方交谈;talk about sb则表示“谈论某人”

12.miss 和lose:miss意思为“发现丢失”“觉得不在”;lose意思为“丢失”“失去”。在本质上,miss是一种主观感觉,而lose是一种客观结果。

13.be used to doing习惯于做某事;used to do过去常常,暗含与现在明显的不同,只用于过去时;be used to do是use的被动语态,意思是….被用来做某事。

14.own 与 have: own强调的是拥有,占有某物为自己的财产,但所占有的东西目前不一定是由人使用,强调所有权;have为普通动词,表示的所有关系。own +n. egWho owns the dog? ;own +宾语+宾补 eg. He owns himself wrong.;own+从句eg. He owns that he is wrong. ;of one’s own完全属于某人自己的;on one’s own独立地,自愿地;with one’s own ears亲耳

15. attend, join, take part in: attend“出席,参加,上学”attend school 上学,attend meeting出席会议;take part in 参加,是指参与某项活动 take an active part in积极参加;join 参加,当join用于加入某个团体或组织,成为其中的一员,后面直接跟名词,当join表示参加某项活动时后面跟介词in .

42

◆unit 3 What were you doing when the UFO arrived?

目标语言:talk about past events and tell a story

重点句型:P19-2b, P20-4,P21-1,

要求背诵的是P20-3a, P22-3

知识点:

1.过去进行时

a) 过去进行时由“was/were+动词ing形式”构成。以动词work为列,其肯定式,否定式,疑问式以及简略答语见下表:

肯定式:I/He/She/It was working. We/You/ They were working.

否定式:I/He/She/It was not working. We/You/They were not working.

疑问式和简略答语:Was I working? Yes, you were.

Was he working? No, he wasn’t.

【注意】was not常简略为wasn’t; were not常简略为weren’t

b) 过去进行时的用法:过去进行时表示过去某一时刻或某一段时间正在进行的动作。这一特定的过去时间,除有上,下文暗示以外,一般用时间状语来表示

2.not …until直到…才。表示动作在某时之前尚未开始,直到此时动作才开始。not…until可以用after或when来代替,但主句谓语动词要用肯定形式。Until为连词时后接时间状语从句,until作介词时,后面接表示时间的名词。Until 用于肯定句多表示动作或状态一直延续到until所表示的时间为止,意思为“直到…” from..till…中till往往表示不太具体的时间。From …to…或from…until常用来表示具体的时间。

3.find it…to do,it在此句中为形式宾语代表动词不定式,动词不定式为真正的宾语,常用于这种用法的动词有find, feel, think, make等。

4.“疑问词+不定式“结构相当于一个名词性从句,常常可用同等成分的从句代替。改写时,只需在疑问词后面加一个适当的主语(这个主语一般与主句的主语一致),并将不定式改成适当形式的谓语即可。如,Where to go is still a question.= Where we should go is still a question.

5.alien 和foreigner “外国人”:alien指住在一个国家,但不是该国公民的人,即侨民;foreigner指生于或来自他国者尤其指有不同语言,文化的人。

6.when 与while:when连接的状语从句是个特殊句型,“前一个分句(谓语动词用过去进行时)+when(作并列连词,意思为“这时,突然”)+后一个分句(谓语动词用一般过去时)”表示在前一个动作正在进行的过程中突然发生了后一个动作, when强调动作的突然性,when后面的动词为非延续性动词;while表示“在….过程中”,强调在一段时间内,所以while引导的从句中的谓语动词必须为延续性动词。在状语从句中,若从句放在句首时,应用逗号与主句隔开。

7.感叹句的构成:What +a/an+形容词+单数名词+主语+谓语!What a good book it is! What+形容词+复数可数名词+主语+谓语!What easy questions they are! What+形容词+不可数名词+主语+谓语!What cold weather it is!

How+形容词+主语+be动词!How nice the watch is!

How +副词+主语+谓语!How hard they are working!

8.take place, happen“发生”:take place指“发生事先计划或预想到的事物”;happen指“一切客观事情或情况的偶然或未能预见地发生”。两者都是不及物动词或短语,后面不能跟宾语,也不能用于被动语态;happen的意义很广泛,而take place 仅用于历史上的事件,集会等,是先行布置而后发生或举行的事件,它不用于地震等自然界的现象。 happen to do 巧遇 sth happens to sb某人遭遇某事

9.不定代词all, both, each,every与not连用时,只表示部分否定,在否定句中用and连 43

接两个宾语,表语,定语,状语时,只表示部分否定,并且否定 and后面的部分;如用or连接句中两个部分,则表示全部否定。如,She isn’t a bright and beautiful girl.她并不是一个既聪明又漂亮的女孩。(部分否定) She isn’t a bright or beautiful girl.她是一个既不聪明又不漂亮的女孩。(全部否定) 10. remember, recall, remind:remember指“过去的事情仍在记忆中,不必费劲就能想起。”;recall比remember正式,指“对自己或他人的过去进行有意的回忆。”;remind指“由于受到提醒或启发而想起往事。 11.in hospital, in the hospital: in hospital指某人生病住院;in the hospital可以指某人在医院里工作。

◆unit 4 He said I was hard-working. 目标语言:report what someone said 重点句型:P27-2a,2b 要求背诵的是P30-3a 知识点:

1.在称述句中直接引语和间接引语的转换: a) 直接引语:说话人直接引用别人的原话。 b) 间接引语:说话人用自己的话把别人的意思转述出来。 c) 直接引语一般前后要加引号;间接引语不用引号。 d) 规则:1)人称变化:从句中的第一人称多改为第三人称;第二人称根据情况改为第一或第三人称;第三人称不变。2)时态变化:如果主句的谓语动词是一般过去时,

如果主句的谓语动词是一般现在时,直接引语变为间接引语时,从句的动词时态保持不变;直接引语如果是客观真理变为间接引语时,时态保持不变。3)其他指示代词,时间状语,地点状语和动词等的变化。直接引语中的一些指示代词,时间状语和地点状语

44

如tomorrow。如果转述的动作发生在当天,无需改变;如果转述的动作不在当天,则需将tomorrow变为the next day.

2.habit, practice, custom: habit指“个人由于自然条件,社会环境,爱好或经常接触而导致可以为常的行为或特性”;practice语气比habit弱,指“个人或大家都习惯了的做法或工作与生活的方式。”;custom指“经过一段时期在某人,地区或社会中形成的传统习惯或风俗。”

3.bring, take, fetch, get, carry: bring指“从别处把东西或人带来”“拿来”,表示将人或物带到或拿到说话者所在的位置的这个动作;take指“把东西带走或拿走”,表示将人或物拿开或带离说话者所在的位置的这个动作;fetch指“到别处去把某人或某物带来或拿来”;get是常用词,多用于口语,与fetch同义;carry指“随身携带(不说明方向)有时含有 “负担”的意思。

4.Surprise用法:1)surprise作名词,表示“惊奇,诧异”;2)surprise作几物动词(后接某人作宾语)表示“使…惊奇”;surprise的过去分词作表语,表示“感到惊奇”;to one’s surprise表示“使…吃惊的是”;be surprised at sth/sb表示“对…感到惊奇”。

5.however 与 but:两者均可作“但是,然而”,而且都引出并列分句。从语义上看,but所表示的是非常明显的对比,转折的意味较however要强;从语法上看,but是并列连词,而however却是连接副词;从语序上看,but总是位于所引出的分句前,而however却可位于句首,句中和句末,但是译成汉语时一定要把它放在分句之首;从标点符号上看,but之后一般不使用逗号,而however则必须用逗号分开。However当连词用时,“无论以何种方式,不管怎样”,引导让步状语从句。

6.at, in与on: 这些用在表示时间方面的瓷前,使用时有一定的规律。1)at表示在某个时间点或某些节日或用于一些习惯用法中;2)in表示在某个时间段,可指在一天的某部分或较长时间(如上午,下午,晚上),月份,季节,年份,世纪,人生的某个时间,或比表示某事再过多久将要发生。;3)on表示在具体的几月几号,星期几或生日,节日或在某一具体日子的上午,下午,晚上。

7.first, at first与first of all:1)first可以做副词,意思是“首先,第一次,最初地”,指第一次做某事或首先做某事,first还可以用作形容词,意思是“第一的,最初的,主要的,一流的”,first作名词,意思是“首要,第一,最初”2)at first的意思是“起初,当初”,指刚刚开始做某事的时候,暗示后来的情况有所改变3)first of all的意思是“第一,最初,首先”,同first的用法相同,但语气上比first要强,常常用来加强语气。

8.true, real: true意思为“真的”“真正的”,强调与实际相符,而不是杜撰的,它与real相对。与to连用,意思是“忠实的”,true用作名词,与定冠词the连用,表示“真实,真理”等;real无此意。Real是形容词,强调客观存在的“真实”“实在”,不是想象的。

9.above, on,over:三者都有“在…上”之意。1)on表示两者上下紧贴在一起2)over表示一种直接的垂直概念,但没有上下紧贴的意思,反义词为under.3)above既不表示垂直的上下概念,也无相互紧贴的意思,反义词是below.

◆unit5 If you go to the party, you’ll have a great time.

目标语言:talk about consequences

重点句型:P34-1a,P35-2b,P36-3a,P37-2b

要求背诵的是P36-3a

知识点:

1.If引导的条件状语从句:1)构成:if引导的条件状语从句表示“如果…”。构成形式为“主句+一般将来时时态+if从句+一般现在时态”,或“If从句+一般现在时态,主句+一般将来时态”。2)用法:表示假设或条件

45

2.half 与half of的用法:1)half the class中的“half”为形容词,意思“一半的,半个的”2) “half of+代词/the+名词”中的half为名词,意思为“一半,半个”。当该结构在句子作主语时,谓语动词必须和该词组中的代词或名词保持数的一致。即当代词或名词为单数时,谓语动词用第三人称单数形式;若所接名词或代词为复数,则谓语动词用复数形式。

3. all the time与always: all the time是个副词性的短语,意思为“一直”“始终”,表示某一特定阶段开始一直到结束,不表示频度,多置于句末。除此,all the time还有“不断”的意思;always为表示频度的副词,意思为“总是”,表示动作的反复,状态的继续,中间没有间断,其反义词为never。它与进行时态连用时,常翻译成“总是”,“老是”,带有赞美,厌烦,不满等感情色彩。

4.Enough的用法:1)enough to do sth表示“足够…可以做…”2)enough也可以用“for+宾语+to do sth的结构”3)enough修饰名词时前面不用冠词4)当主语是代词时,enough可以作表语。当主语是名词时,enough不能做表语。

5.Choose的用法:1)choose+名词 意思为“选择…”;2)choose+between/from从…中选择;3)choose to do选择做某事

6.Exercise的用法:1)运动,锻炼,是不可数名词2)体操,练习,是可数名词。3)动词,使….运动

7.wear, put on, have on, dress: wear“穿着”“戴着”,表示状态,是延续性动词,一般现在时表示经常状态,现在进行时表示暂时状态;put on“穿上”“戴上”,表示动作,是非延续性动词;have on“穿着”“戴着”,表示状态可以与wear互换;dress“穿上”“穿着”,既表示状态,也表示动作,既可以作及物动词,也可以作不及物动词。Dress作及物动词,表示“给自己或别人穿(衣服)”,宾语是人,常用被动语态。dress oneself给。。穿衣服。dress up化装

8.a lot, a lot of与lots of三者都有“许多,很多”的意思。a lot of, lots of一般用于肯定句,后接可数名词复数或不可数名词;a lot作名词时=a lot of thins,作副词,修饰动词或形容词,副词比较级。

◆unit 6 How long have you been collecting shells?

目标语言:talk about how long you have been doing things

重点句型:P44-1c,P45-2a,P47-1b,P48-4a

要求背诵的是P46-3a,P48-3a,P49-2

知识点:

1.现在完成时的意义:1)表示过去发生的某一动作对现在造成的影响或结果。常用的时间状语有already, yet,ever, never, just等2)表示从过去已经开始,持续到现在的动作或状态,常常和表示一段时间的状语连用。常见的表示一段时间的状语有:for+一段时间,since+时间点。如,We have learned English for 4 years. Miss Zhao has been at this school since2002.2)构成形式:助动词have/has+动词的过去分词3)a.It is the first / second time…. that…结构中的从句部分,用现在完成时。 It is the first time that I have visited the city.

It was the third time that the boy had been late.

b.This is the… that…结构,that 从句要用现在完成时.

This is the best film that I've (ever) seen.

这是我看过的最好的电影。

This is the first time (that) I've heard him sing. 这是我第一次听他唱歌。词构成:注意:非延续性动词的否定形式可以与表示延续时间的状语连用。即动作不发生的状态是可以 46

持续的。I haven't received his letter for almost a month.

2.怎样区别现在完成时和现在完成进行时现在让我们来比较一下现在完成时和现在完成进行时。在比较这两个时态时,关键在于对现在完成进行时的基本概念是否理解,因为对于现在完成时我们已经有了一个基本的理解了。

现在完成进行时是一兼有现在完成时和现在进行时二者基本特点的时态。由于它有现在完成时的特点,所以它可以表示某一动作对现在产生的结果或影响。由于它有现在进行时的特点,所以它也可以表示某一动作的延续性、临时性、重复性、生动性乃至感情色彩。

现在就现在完成进行时的这些特点和现在完成时作一简单的比较:

(1)现在完成进行时和现在完成时皆可表示动作对现在产生的结果,但前者所表示的结果是直接的,而后者所表示的则是最后的结果。如:

We have been cleaning the classroom.(a)

We have cleaned the classroom.(b)

(a)句可译为“我们打扫教室来着。”其直接结果可能是:我们身上都是灰。(b)句可以译为“我们把教室打扫过了。”其结果是:现在教室很清洁,可以用了。又,(a)句表示教室刚刚打扫过,(b)句则可能表示教室是昨天打扫的。

Be careful! John has been painting the door.(a)

John has painted the door.(b)

(a)句表示约翰刚刚把门油漆过,现在油漆还未干,所以你要小心。(b)句则无此含义,油漆可能已干了。

(2)现在完成进行时有时有延续性,现在完成时往往没有。如:

They have been widening the road.(a)

They have widened the road.(b)

(a)句的意思是他们在加宽马路,但尚未完工。(b)句的意思则是已完工了。有时现在完成时有延续性(如一些属于持续体的动词),但无临时性质。如:

Mr. Smith has been living in London since 1978.(a)

Mr. Smith has lived in London since 1979.(b)

(a)句有“史密斯先生在伦敦久居”的含义,(b)句则没有。

(3)但现在完成进行时并不总是具有临时的性质,如:

My moth! er has been teaching English for twenty years.(a)

My mother has taught English for twenty years.(b)

(a)句在此并无临时性质,但较口语化。(b)句则较为正式。又,(a)句表示动作现在仍在继续.并将延续下去,(b)句的动作是否延续下去,须由上下文决定,但在一般情况下都是延续下去的。

(4)现在完成进行时往往表示动作在重复,现在完成时则常常不带重复性。如: Have you been meeting her lately?(a)

Have you met her lately?(b)

(a)句有“经常相会”之意,(b)句则没有。(b)句如与often,every day等时间状语连用,当然也表示动作在重复。

(5)现在完成进行时比较生动,有时含有明显的感情色彩,而现在完成时往往只说明一个事实,一种影响或结果,平铺直叙,没有什么感情色彩可言。如:

What have you been doing?(a)

What have you done?(b)

(a)句表示惊异。(b)句只是一个问题。

47

Have you been waiting long?(a)

Have you waited long?(b)

(a)句较(b)句生动。又,(a)句比较口语化。

I have been wanting to meet you for long.(a)

I have long wanted to meet you.(b)

(a)句比(b)句更亲切,更有礼貌。

Recently Mary has been doing her work regularly.(a)

Recently Mary has done her work regularly.(b)

(a)句显然是在表扬玛丽。(b)只说明一个事实。

下面还有一例,颇为有趣:

Who's been eating my apples?(a)

Who's eaten my apples?(b)

(a)句有强烈的感情色彩,表示愤怒不满,(b)句只是希望回答的一个问题。又,(a)句兼有进行时态,所以有“苹果未被全部吃光”的意思,(b)句是完成时态,说明“苹果一个不剩了”。

3.现在完成进行时的含义:表示过去某一时间开始到现在经常重复的动作。

现在完成进行时的构成:助动词have/has been+v.ing形式。当主语为第三人称单数十,助动词用has,其他人称用have.

现在完成进行时的用法:主要表示现在以前这一段时间里一直在进行的一个动作,这个动作可能仍然在进行,也可能停止了一会儿。

4。for 的用法:1)在回答How long…?的问句时,for表示所指时间或距离的全部,在这个含义上与表示“特定期间中某个长度”的during 不同。2)可以用在过去时,现在时,将来时中,但是若表示持续进行到现在为止时,则不能用现在时,而要用现在完成时。如,I have known him for years.我认识他很多年了。3)表示某事物在所述时间要发生。如,The next meeting was arranged for the fifth of June.下次会议定为6月5日举行。

5.since 用法:1)conj.自…以后;自从,后接从句表示以过去的某个时间为起点,持续到现在或过去的某个时候。Since之后可以接过去时的句子,也可以接表示过去的时间点。如,I have been at his bedside since he became ill.自从他生病以来我一直在他床边陪伴着他。2)prep.自…来,从…(至今)如,I have been in this business since 1980.自从1980年以来,我一直经营这个生意。

【注意】since除了可以与现在完成时连用外,还可以与过去完成时,现在完成进行时连用。

【扩展】since, for都可以与完成时态连用。Since用来说明动作的起始时间,而for用来说明动作延续时间,因此,since后跟表示某一时间点的名词短语,for后面跟表示一段时间的名词短语。

6.each 的用法:1)adj.各个的,各自的,每一个的。置于单数可数名词之前。如,Each car has a steering wheel.每辆汽车都有方向盘。2)pron.各个,各自。谓语动词用单数形式。如,Each has his own task.每个人都有自己的工作。

Each, every: each指两个或两个以上的人或事物中的“每个”;every指三个以上的人或事物的全体,和all的意思相近;every只修饰单数名词,谓语动词用单数,each为形容词修饰单数名词,谓语动词为单数。作代词,单独使用,接单数动词,放在复数名词和代词后作同位语,接复数谓语动词;代表each与every的物主代词可以用his也可以用their.

【扩展】each of之后接名词或代词的复数形式,接名词时一定要附加the或my等词,即“each of+代词的复数形式”或“each of+the/my+名词的复数形式”,但谓语动词要用 48

单数形式。如,Each of them has an idea of that.对此每个人各有见解。

7.a pair of一双,一对,一条,后面用名词复数。当含有pair的名词短语做主语时,谓语动词要与pair的数保持一致。

8.ago与before“以前”:ago表示从现在算起一段时间“以前”,和动词的一般过去时连用。放在所修饰词的后面。Before则表示从过去某时算起若干时间以前,用于完成时。ago,before前可以与具体时间连用“多少时间之前”

9.含有half的表达方式:数词+名词(单/复数)+and +a half; 数词+and+a half+名词(复数)

10.Because, since, as, for:四个词都表示“原因”的连词。以上连词的语气由强到弱依次为because-since-as-for其中because,since,as从属连词,引导原因状语从句;for为并列连词,连接两个并列句。a)because“因为”,表示直接原因回答why的提问,一般放在主句之后,可单独存在。b)since“因为”“既然”,侧重主句从句表示虽然的或已知的理由。如,Since everyone is here, let’s begin.c)as“由于”,主从句并重,从句说明原因,主句说明结果。As it was late, I must hurry up.d)for“因为,由于”,表明附加或推断的理由,引导的从句前常有逗号,for从句不放在句首。He must be ill, for he isn’t here today.

11.thank you for +n./v.ing感谢某人(做)某事,多用于事情已发生的场合;与will连用,表示请求,要求;thank you to +v. 感谢做某事,多用于事情未发生的场合; thanks to+n.多亏…,由于

12.Probably副词,相当于almost certainly,意思为“或许,大概,很可能”一般不放在not等含有否定意义的词之后。

13.run out, run out of: run out“用完了”,主语通常为时间,食物,金钱,不用于被动语态;run out of“用完了”,表示主动含义,主语一般为人,多用于进行时和完成时。

14.Teach的用法:teach sb sth教某人学某事;teach doing教导做…, 教…;teach sb to do教某人做某事;teach sb+that从句 教育人….

15.被动语态:1)被动语态的基本构成形式:主语+助动词be+构成形式2)被动语态的时态:被动语态的时态是通过助动词be的变化拉力体现。这个助动词必须与主语的人称 主动语态:主语(动作发出者)→谓语(及物动词)→宾语(动作承受者)

49

被动语态:主语(动作承受者)←谓语(be+动词过去分词)←宾语(动作发出者) He wrote the letter. →The letter was written by him.

4)主动句变被动句的基本句式:

a) 主:主语+助动词(情态动词)+谓语+宾语

被:主语(原宾语)+助动词(情态动词)+be+动词过去分词+by+原主语

如,We will help him.→He will be helped by us.

b) 主:主语+动词短语+宾语

被:主语(圆宾语)+be+动词短语的过去分词+by+原主语

如,They looked after the babies.→The babies were looked after by them.

c) 主:主语+谓语+间接宾语+直接宾语

被:主语(间接宾语)+be+动词过去分词+原直接宾语

主语(直接宾语))+be+动词过去分词+to(for)+原间接宾语+(by+原主语)

如,We gave him some magazines.→He was given some magazines.

Some magazines were given to him by us.

【注意】一般将主动句中表示人的间接宾语变为被动句中的主语。

d) 主:主语+谓语+宾语+宾语补足语

被:主语(原宾语)+be+过去分词+原宾语补足语

如,They elected him their monitor.→He was elected their monitor.

We told her to have a rest.→She was told to have a rest.

We heard the baby crying.→Thy baby was heard crying.

【注意】如果主动句中宾语补足语是不带to的不定式,变成被动语态后一般要加to. I saw him go to the church.→He was seen to go to the church.

The boss made Tom work day and night.→Tom was made to work day and night.

【扩展】一般在以下几种情形时,需要使用被动语态。

1) 不知道动作的执行者,只知道动作的承受者时。

When we got there, the room had been cleaned already.

2) 不必要说出或出于礼貌不便说出动作的执行者时。

I was told that you were not honest enough.

3)有必要突出或强调动作的承受者时。

You were asked to answer this question.

16.if与whether:if和whether均可用于宾语从句中,意为“是否”;if用于条件句中,表示“如果”,不能和or连用;whether常与or连用,表示两种条件或情况。

Whether it rains or not, they decide to go.

【扩展】if not..如果不是…,表示惊讶或憎恶等情绪;if only意为“若…那就好了,我多么希望…”相当于how I wish;only..if..意为“决不…除非…”

If it hadn’t been for the doctor’s care, I should not be speaking to you now.如果不是医生的照顾,我现在就不会和你说话了。

If only he arrives in time!若他及时到达就好了。

I’ll only come if you promise me that you won’t invite Henry.除非你答应不请亨利,否则我不会来。

◆ unit7 Would you mind turning down the music?

目标语言:make requests and apologize.

50

重点句型:P52-1a,P53-2a&2b,P55-1a,

要求背诵的是P54-3a, P56-3a

知识点:

1. 基本用法:1)Would you mind doing?=Do you mind doing..?“你介意…?” “请你…好不好?”是一种比较客气的表达方式。Would you mind opening the window? 2)如果要表示“请你不要做…好吗?”只需在doing 前面加not. Would you mind not sitting in front of me?;应答用语:1)如果同意表示不介意时,可用如下用语来表达:Certainly not.; Of course not.;No,not at all.;Not at all.“好,可以”2)如果不同意表示介意时,常用“Sorry.”“I’m sorry, but…”及陈述某种理由来表示拒绝或反对。;这一句型中的逻辑主语只能是谈话的对方you,如果想要对方允许自己做某事,可以用 “Would you mind my doing..?句型。

2. 形容词与副词之间的转化:1)以le结尾去e变y,possible→possibly;2)在形容词后直接加ly,usual→usually;3)在以辅音字母+e结尾直接加ly,wide→widely;4)以元音字母+e结尾,去e加ly,true→truly;5)以辅音字母+y结尾变y为i+ly,happy→happily

3. not at all“一点也不”用在否定句中,加强语气。表示程度,还可以用于口语交际中作否定回答。

4. put on, wear, dress,have on, in: put on强调动作过程“穿上”为瞬间动词;wear表示结果或状态“穿着”,持续动词;dress强调穿的动作,后面不能跟宾语(衣服)等,还可以作名词,意思是“服装”,dress up化装,dress oneself 给某人穿衣服,dress in穿衣服,have on表示“穿…”,相当于wear,但没有进行时态;in介词,后跟表示颜色的名词,表示穿着某种颜色的衣服。

5. just, just now ,right now: just“刚刚”,用于完成时;just now“刚才”,用于过去时;right now“立刻”,用于将来时。

6. in a minute, soon等多用于将来时,表示即将去做某事

in+时间段,after+时间段:1)“in+时间段”只能用于一般将来时,“after+时间段”可以用于过去时和将来时2)当二者都用于将来时的时候“in+时间段”表示从现在算起在一定时间内,动作将在未来一周之内的某一个具体时间内发生。“after+时间段”是从这段时间之后算起,动作将在这段时间之后发生。

7. very, too, so, quite以上几个副词均修饰形容词,副词表示程度,“很,太,非常”;very应用最普遍“很”,只是一个表示程度的副词,它表示的程度比quite要强得多,very只用来修饰形容词和副词的原级;too“太”,一般表示“相对某人而言”;so“如此…,那么…”,往往表明某一事物的程度时,会引起另一种后果。换言之,so所修饰的人或物表示原因后面会有表示结果的句子。So…that…如此…以致于;quite既可以表示充分肯定,意思是 “完全;十分”,也可以表示程度,意思是“完全,十分”,也可以表示程度,意思是“相当”,quite可修饰动词,v.ing,形容词,副词,分词等。quite a +adj+n. a very+adj.+n

8. move from…to …从…搬到…,迁移;move on继续向前走

9. yet, already,still:yet用于疑问句中,意为“现在,已经”;用于否定句中,意为“还没”;already与still用于肯定句中,already意为“已经”,still意为“还,仍然”,already若用于疑问句中,表示惊讶或意外;yet与still都可以修饰比较级,意为“更加,益发”。 10. put away收好,储蓄,放弃;put down放下,扑灭,写下;put…into…把…翻译成…;put off延期;put up举起,张贴,修建;put on穿上,上演

11. See的用法:1)see+从句,意为“看到…,留意…”如,I saw that you weren’t among the students.2)see sb do sth.看到某人做某事;see sb doing看到某人正在做某事;see+ 51

名词 看到

12. voice, sound, noise:在这组词中,voice可以作名词或动词;sound可以作名词,动词,形容词和副词;noise只能用作名词。这里仅就它们作名词表示“声音”时的用法进行辨析。1)voice专指人的声音(如说话,唱歌,笑的时候发出的声音等)。偶尔也指禽,虫鸣叫的声音,但一般不用于指其他动物的叫声。2)sound表示能听见的任何声音。3)noise通常是指大而令人不快的噪音,嘈杂声,喧闹声等。4)sound和noise常与动词make连用,而voice则不能和make连用。

13. take care意为“当心”,可单独使用或后接从句和动词不定式。同义词组为be careful和look out;take a seat坐下同义词组为sit down;take an interest in对…感兴趣;take away拿走,使离开,消失;take back收回(语言,话语);take care of照顾,注意,保养;take charge of负责,接管;take down拿下来,取下来,记下来,拆除;take for granted 想当然,认为,后接宾语从句,此时常以it作形式宾语;take hold of抓住;take in接受,理解,包括;take off脱下,匆匆离开,起飞,停止使用;take office就职;take on接受,雇佣;take out取出,带。..出来;take part in参加;take place发生,没有被动语态;take pride in为。..感到自豪;take sb’s place代替某人;take up从事,占用;take it easy不要过于紧张,别着急

◆ unit8 Why don’t you get her a scarf?

目标语言:compare qualities

重点句型:P60-1c,p61-2c,p62-3a,p63-2c,

知识点:

1. get, receive,accept:get有“得到”“获得”的意思,在表示“获得”某物时,可能是被动接受也有可能是主动争取;receive指收到了什么东西,不一定接受,receive a letter from…收到…的来信;accept着重指以愉悦的态度或经过自己的争取而得到或取得某物。 2. 情态动词should:1)表示义务,意为“应该,应当,最好”,比must较为委婉;

2)与疑问词连用,表示意外,纳闷,惊讶等,意为“究竟是…;到底…”.

3. 表示建议:1)How/What about+名词/代词/动词-ing形式?2)Why don’t you +动词原形?=Why not+动词原形?3)Let’s…以let’s开头的祈使句,表示建议对方和自己一起做某事。Let’s后接动词原形。4)Shall we…?以Shall we…?开头的疑问句,用于建议对方和自己一起做某事。回答时如赞成,常用Yes, let’s.

4. too…to……而不能…,to后面接动词原形具有否定含义。这一句型常可以转换成so…that…句型。当这种too…to…句型转换成so…that句型时,为保持句意的一致,that引导的结果状语从句要根据时态用情态动词can’t或couldn’t加动词原形,that从句中的谓语动词要带宾语。

The boy is too young to go to school.=The boy is so young that he can’t go to school.

The box is too big for me to carry.= The box is so big that I can’t carry it.

【注意】当动词不定式和主语在逻辑上构成动宾关系时,该动词后面不能再用it或them作宾语,该动词如果是不及物动词,则必须在其后面加上相当的介词或副词,方可与主语构成搭配。如,The ice is too thin for me to skate on.

5. instead, instead of: instead为副词,在句中独立作状语,instead of为介词短语,后面一般接名词,代词,介词和接动词-ing形式。

6. for example, such as: for example例如,诸如。多作插入语,当它表示“例如“时,其后面必须有逗号;such as相当于like,意思为 “象…那样,例如,诸如”,其后面直接加名词。

7. contest, compete,contend三者都有“竞争”的含义,均为动词:contest指在竞争中毫无保留地展示自己;compete指在体育或辩论等需要竞争的活动中,为征服或取胜 52

而进行的努力。有时暗指在奖赏的鼓励或刺激下进行竞争;contend暗示竞争的紧张程度。通常指双方成功的机会相等,所以为取胜或征服对方就需要艰苦的努力。强调奋斗或斗争的必要性。

8. contest,competition:contest指双方或多方对垒比赛,多指体育比赛,并且在比赛中的每一个人或每一个队都力图战胜对方;competition多指能力,技巧,知识等方面的比赛,竞争。

9. By的用法:by后跟表示交通工具的名词,意思为“乘,坐”;by意思为“凭借,用,靠”,表示方法或手段,常与v.-ing连用;by意思为“在…旁边”,用来表示地点,意义和用法近似于beside;by意思为“按照…,根据…”;by意思为“经过”,后常跟go, run, walk之类的动词;by用于被动语态中,后跟的名词表示行为的执行者,意思为“被,由”;by意思为“按…(计算)”,用来表示计量;by oneself独自;by the way顺便

10. as well的同义词为too,意思是“也”;as well as意思为“同,和,也”。用来连接名词和代词等。谓语动词用单数还是复数形式,要根据as well as前的名词或代词确定。与动词连用时,用v-ing形式;as well as同义词组为not only…but also…但侧重顺序不同。

◆ unit 9 Have you ever been to an amusement park?

目标语言:talk about past experiences

重点句型:P69-2b,p71-1a&2a

要求背诵的是P72-3a

知识点:

1. 现在完成时表示发生或已经完成的某一动作对现在造成的影响或结果。通常表示短暂动作或位置转移的动词(非延续性动词,不能与表示一段时间的状语连用;也可以表示过去开始,一直延续到现在的动作或状态。也就上说,现在完成时虽与过去有关,但实际上强调的是对现在的影响或结果,句中谓语动词通常是延续性动词,且常与表示一段时间状语连用(these days,all this year, recently,for+时间段,since+时间点)

2. 通常与现在完成时连用的几个副词:already,recently,just, ever,never,before,yet等。表示不确定时间的时间词连用。Already,just多用于肯定句;yet,ever,never多用于疑问句或否定句。

3. 现在完成时的结构:主语+have/has+动词过去分词

4. have been to, have gone to:have been to“到过某地”说话时此人很可能不在那里,已经回来,侧重指经历;have gone to“已经去了某地”,说话时此人在那里,或可能在路上,反正不在说话现场。

5. neither开头的倒装句:在英语中“Neither+助动词/情态动词/+主语”这个倒装结构是一种否定形式,表示“两者都不”。如,I can’t work out the problem. Neither can Li Ming.

6. be from, come from:两者都为“从…来,出自…”;表示“出身于…”,应用come from

【注意】问别人的出身或叙述自己的出身时,时态一定要用一般现在时,如果时态为一般过去时,则表示“从…地方来”。

7.Population的用法:1)population是个集合名词,意思为“人口,人数”,常用来指人口的总称。被看作一个整体时,一般不加-s,在句中作主语时,谓语动词多用单数形式。如,The population of China is about1,300,000,000.

2)如果指一个整体中有多少人数是干什么的时候,谓语动词要用复数形式,这时强调的是一部分人。如,Half of the population in that country are farmers.3)表示“…的人口”时,既可用“the population of+地名”,也可用“the population in +地点”,作主语中心词时谓 53

语动词用单数形式。如,The population in Shenyang is about 8 million.4)表示某国,某城市有多少人口时,用have/has a population of…结构。如,New Zealand has a population of 3,800,000.5)对人口数量提问用what或what large。用large或big表示人口多,用small表示人口少。

8.practice doing练习做某事;go doing sth去做某事;like doing sth喜欢做某事;forget doing sth忘记做过事情;remember doing sth记得做过某事;stop doing sth停止做某事;finish doing sth完成做某事;enjoy doing sth喜爱做某事;keep doing sth连续不断地做某事;mind doing sth介意做某事

9.If的用法:if引导的条件状语从句表示“如果…”。构成形式为“主句+一般将来时态+if从句+一般现在时态”,或“If从句+一般现在时态,主句+一般将来时态”;if还可以引导虚拟语气,表示假设的情况或是发生的可能性不大的情况,从句用过去的某种时态。

10.Sleepy,sleeping:sleepy可作表语或定语,意思为“想睡的,困的”,可用very 修饰;sleeping所修饰的名词可以是人也可以是物。

◆unit10 It’s a nice day, isn’t it?

目标语言:make small talk

重点句型:P76-1c,P77-2b,P78-3a,P79-2b

要求背诵的是P80-3a

知识点:

1、反意疑问句:1)反意疑问句的含义:当对所陈述的某种情况不确定而反问对方时,常用反意疑问句来表达。2)反意疑问句的构成:陈述句+简略疑问句→前部分肯定陈述句+后部分否定疑问句;前部分否定陈述句+后部分肯定疑问句。3)使用反意疑问句时的注意事项:a.前后两部分要在人称上保持一致。b.时态要保持一致(或动词要保持一致)c.回答的一致性(特别注意中文翻译)。注意:yes与no后面的回答部分要一致。4)使用反意疑问句时的特殊情况:a.在祈使句后进行附加疑问句时,用will you表示请求。b.在Let’s后面,常用shall we,表示征询意见。c.在Let us…后面进行附加疑问时,用will you,这一点属于祈使句范围。d 在英语口语中,I am 后面的附加疑问句部分常用aren’t I .e 由nothing作主语的句子,附加问句中人称代词用it.f.由nobody作主语的句子,附加问句中用they代替nobody.g.如果陈述句部分主语是everyone,someone,anyone,no one等不定代词,其附加疑问句部分的主语可以用he,也可用they.h There be…后面的附加疑问句部分仍用there. i.如果陈述句部分含有否定副词never,few,little等词时,则其附加疑问句部分用肯定形式。J.反意疑问句要求用yes或no来回答,当陈述句部分为否定形式时,回答要特别注意两种语言的表达习惯的不同,注意根据实际情况前后保持一致。

2、cost, price:cost作名词时表示“费用”,通常指服务费,学习费,生活费或房租费等,

price通常指具体物品的价格。询问价钱用how much来提问。

3、at lest:至少,最少。其中least为little的最高级,little的比较级为less;无论如何

4、Prepare的用法:1)prepare for为…做准备,相当于get ready for2)prepare+名词+for +名词,意思为“为…准备…”.3)prepare+名词+to do sth意思为“为…而做准备。”4)prepare to do准备做某事

Unit 1 Will people have robots?

1. fewer people 更少的人(fewer修饰名词复数,表示否定)

2. less free time 更少的空闲时间(less修饰不可数名词,表示否定)

3. in ten years 10年后(in的时间短语用于将来时,提问用How soon)

4. fall in love with… 爱上…

例:When I met Mr. Xu for the first time, I fell in love with him at once

54

当我第一次见到许老师,我立刻爱上他

5. live alone 单独居住

6. feel lonely 感到孤独(比较:live alone/go along等)

The girl walked alone along the street, but she didn’t feel lonely那女孩独自沿着街道

走,但她并不感到孤独

7. keep/feed a pet pig 养一头宠物猪

8. fly to the moon 飞上月球

9. hundreds of +复数 数百/几百(概数,类似还有thousands of; millions of)

10. the same as 和……相同

11. A be different from B A与B不同(=There is a difference/Thgere are differences

between A and B)

12. wake up 醒来(wake sb. up表示 “唤醒某人”

13. get bored 变得厌倦(get/become是连系动词,后跟形容词如tired/angry/excited等)

14. go skating 去滑冰(类似还有go hiking/fishing /skating/bike riding等)

15. lots of/a lot of 许多(修饰可数名词、不可数名词都可以)

16. at the weekends 在周末

17. study on computers 通过电脑学习

18. agree with sb. 同意某人(的意见)

19. I don’t agree. = I disagree. 我不同意

20. on a piece of paper 在一张纸上(注意

paper/information/news/work/homework/housework等常考到的不可数名词)

21. on vacation 度假

22. help sb with sth/help sb do sth 帮助某人做某事

23. many different kinds of goldfish 许多不同种金鱼

24. live in an apartment 住在公寓里/live on the twelfth floor住在12楼

25. live at NO.332,Shanghai Street 住在上海路332号

26. as a reporter 作为一名记者

27. look smart 显得精神/看起来聪明

28. Are you kidding? 你在骗我吗

29. in the future 在将来/在未来

30. no more=not …anymore 不再(强调多次发生的动作不再发生)

31. no longer=not… any longer 不再(强调状态不再发生)

32. besides(除…之外还,包括)与except =but(除…之外,不包括)

33. be able to与can 能、会

? (be able to用于各种时态,而can只能用于一般现在时态和一般过去时态中;have to

用于各种时态,而must只能用于一般现在时态)例如: 1.I have been able to/will be able

to speak two languages. (不可以用can)

2. will have to/ had to stay at home. (不可以用must)

1.There will be sth.= There is /are going to be sth. 将有…..

2.be free 空闲的

3.on computer 在电脑上

4.live to be + 岁数 活到…

5.fewer +可数名词复数 更少...

6.less +不可数名词 更少的…

7.(many /much) more +可数名词复数/不可数名词 更多的…

55

8.be crowded 拥挤的

9.in five years 五年后(一般将来时)

10.five years ago 五年前(一般过去时)

11.Sb will be +职业 某人将成为…

12.live in …住在…

13.fly to the moon 飞到月亮上

14.fall in love with …爱上…

15.be able to do sth =can do sth 能做…

16.keep a pet 养宠物

17.What will the weather be like tomorrow ?明天天气将会怎么样?

18.come true 实现

19.hear of …听说…

20.in the future 在将来

21.help sb (to) do sth = help sb with +名词 帮助某人做…

22.hundreds of 数百

23.thousands of 数千

24.try to do sth尽力做…

25.try not to do sth尽力不做…

26.make/let sb +动词原形 让某人做…

27.the same as …与…相同

28.look like …看起来像…

29.wake up 醒来

30.It’s +形容词+(for sb)+to do sth 对某人而言,做某事是…的

31.over and over again 反复,一遍又一遍

32.There be sb/sth +doing +地点 某处有…在做…

33.look for …寻找

Unit 2 What should I do?

1. too loud 太大声

2. out of style 过时的

3. in style 流行的

4. call sb up=ring sb.up=call/ring/phone sb. 给…..打电话

5. enough money 足够的钱(enough修饰名词时不必后置)

6. busy enough 够忙 (enough修饰形容词或副词时必须后置)

7. a ticket to/for a ball game 一张球赛的门票

注意:the key to the lock/the key(answer)r to the question)/the solution to the problem .此处几个短语不能用of表示所有格

8. talk about 谈论

9. on the phone 用电话

10. pay for 付款

11. spend…on +sth.=spend...( in) doing sth. 在…花钱

12. It takes sb. sometime to do sth. 某人做某事花…的时间

13. borrow …from 从….借( 借进来)

14. lend…to 把…借给(借出去)

15. You can keep the book for a week 你可以借这本书一周。(不用borrow或lend)

16. buy sth for sb 为……买东西

56

17. tell sb to do /not to do sth.sth 告诉某人做某事

18. want sb. to do sth.=would like sb. to do 想某人做某事

19. find out 发现;查清楚;弄明白

20. play one’s stereo 放录象

21. fail the test=not pass the test 考试不及格

22. fail in (doing) sth… 在...上失败,变弱

23. succeed in (doing) sth 在...方面成功

24. write sb a letter/write to sb. 给某人写信

25. surprise sb. 使某人吃惊(类似有:surprise/interest/please/amaze+某人)

26. to one’s surprise 使某人吃惊的是…..

27. to one’s joy 使某人高兴的是…..

28. look for a part-time job 找一份兼职的工作(不一定有结果)

29. get/find a part-time job 找到一份兼职的工作(有结果)

30. ask sb. for… 寻求/向某人要某物

31. have a bake sale 卖烧烤

32. argue with sb = have an argument with sb. 与某人争吵

33. have a fight with sb.=fight with 与某人打架

34. drop off 离去;散去;逐渐减少;死去

35. prepare for…=get ready for… 为…做准备

36. after-school clubs 课外俱乐部

? be/get used to doing 习惯做某事

? used to do 过去经常/常常做某事

? be used for doing=be used to do sth. 被用于做某事

37. fill… up 填补;装满…

38. return sth. to sb.=give sth. back to sb. 把某物归还给某人

39. get on /along well with 与…相处很好

40. all kinds of 各种各样

41. as much as possible=as much as possible 尽可能多

42. take part in=join in 参加(某种活动/集会)

43. a bit =a little 一点儿(当修饰形容词或比较级时)

44. a bit of =a little 一点儿/一些(当修饰不可数名词时)

45. be angry with… 生…的气

46. by oneself+on one’s own 某人自己/独自地

47. on the one hand 一方面

48. on the other hand 另一方面

49. I find/feel/think it difficult to do... 我发现/感到/认为做某事很难.

50. see/hear/watch sb. doing sth. 看到/听见/注视某人正在做…

51. not…until 直到…才(谓语动词一般是非延续动词)

52. 表示某人情绪有关的形容词用法:

be/become+ upset/tired/excited/interested/worried/surprised/amazed/annoyed

说明:当主语是某人时,注意后面的形容词一般是-ed结尾的单词,而当主语是某物时或修饰名词时,注意后面形容词一般是-ing结尾单词.)

例如:I was surprised/interested/amazed when I heard the surprising/interesting/amazing news.

1.want sb to do sth =would like sb to do sth 想要某人做…

2.argue with ..和…争吵

57

3.out of style 过时

4.in style 流行的

5.adj/adv +enough足够的…

6.enough +n 足够的

7.What’s wrong with …? =What’s the matter/trouble/problem with…? 某人/某物怎么啦?

8.call sb up =call sb 给某人打电话

9.a ticket to a ball game 一场球赛的票

10.write sb a letter =write a letter to sb 给某人写信

11.on the phone 在电话上

12.talk about 谈论…

13.be surprised at sth/doing sth 对…感到惊讶

14.get a part time job 找到一份兼职工作

15.borrow sth from …从…借到…

16.lend sth to sb 把…借给…

17.ask sb for sth 向某人请求

18.either也 否定句句末 too 肯定句句末

19.buy sth for sb = buy sb sth 为某人买…

20.like to do sth /like doing sth 喜欢做…

21.That’s a good idea 好主意

22.tell sb (not) to do sth 告诉某人(不要)做某事

23.I don’t know what to do 我不知道做什么

24.else别的 位于特殊疑问词和不定代词之后(somebody else , what else) other 放在名词

之前

25.except sb/sth/doing sth 除…之外 (不包括) besides 除…之外还有

26.be upset 沮丧

27.leave sth +介词地点 把…遗忘在…

28.get on/along well with sb 和某人相处得好

29.have a (fight with) sb 与某人打架

30.give some advice 提建议

31.busy enough 足够忙的

32.from…to 从…到…

33.It’s time for +名词 = It’s time to do sth 该做…的时候了

34.as much as possible 尽可能多的

35.complain about sb/sth/doing sth 抱怨…

36.under too much pressure 处于太大的压力下

37.take part in …参加…

38.see sb doing sth 看见某人在做… see sb do sth 看见某人做了…

39.compare …with…把…和…作比较

40.send sb. sth. =send sth to sb 送某人某物

41.Sb. find it +形容词+to do sth某人发觉做某事是…的

eg: We find it important to learn English .

42.on the one hand 在一方面

43.on the other hand 在另一方面

Unit 3 What were you doing when the UFO arrived?

1. in front of 在??的前面(外部)

58

2. in the front of 在??的前面(内部)

3. in the library 在图书馆

4. get out of/get into 出??之外/进入

5. sleep late 睡懒觉

6. sleep well 睡得好

7. get to sleep 睡着

8. walk down/along 沿??走

9. take off (飞机)起飞;脱下(衣帽)

10. on Sunday evening 在星期日晚上

注意:(特指某日如星期、假日、某月某日或某个特定的上、下午、晚上用on)

11. in the tree 在树上

12. take photos 照相

13. at the train station 在火车站

14. run away 跑开,逃跑

15. as+adj原形 as 和…一样…

例如: She is (not) as beautiful as her sister. I can run as fast as he(him)

16. buy/draw/make sth. for sb. 为某人买/画/制作

17. walk home 走回家

18. in history 在历史上

19. for example 例如

20. in the city of 在??市

21. on the playground 在操场上

22. ten minutes ago 十分钟前

23. take place 发生(强调必然性)

24. happen to sth./sb. 发生(强调偶然性)

例如:What has happened to you?=What’s the matter with you?=What’s wrong with you?

25. of course=sure=certainly 当然

26. all over the world=around the world 遍及全世界

27. outside/inside the station 在车站外/内

28. next to 相邻,紧贴

29. close to 接近于;在附近

30. be ill in hospital/bed 生病住院/在床

31. hear about/of 听说(间接听到)

32. in silence 沉默不语

1.in front of…在…的前面(范围外) in the front of (范围内)

2.get out of …从…出来

3.take off from… 从…起飞

4.land on …降落…

5.call the police 报警

6.at around 10 o’clock 在大约10点钟

7.follow sb to do sth 跟随某人做某事

8.walk down …沿着…走

9.jump down 跳下来

10.take a photo 照像

11. on/in the tree在树上

59

12.run away 逃跑

13.think about …考虑…

14.ask sb (not) to do sth 请某人(不要)做某事

15.in silence 沉默地

16.at that time 在那时 at this time 在这时

17.in space 在太空中

18.Man walked on the moon for the first time . 人类第一次在月球上行走.

19.all over the world =around the world 全世界

20.in the city of …在…市

21.take place = happen 发生

22.hear about … 听说…

23.be born 出生

24.as +形/副(原级)+as …与…一样

33. 25.The girl was shopping when the alien got out. /While the girl was shopping ,the alien got out . 当女孩在买东西的时候,外星人出来了.

Unit 4 He said I was hard-working

1. every Saturday 每周六

2. first of all 首先

3. both……and…… 两者都(谓语动词要注意对称原则)

4. neither….nor 两者都不(谓语动词要注意就近和对称原则)

5. most of… 绝大多数

6. an exciting week 令人兴奋的一周

7. agree on something 同意某人的计划;对….取得 一致意见

8. agree to do sth. 答应/同意做…

9. pass on 传递

10. be supposed to do sth. 被期望或被要求做... ...

11. be mad at …… 对??疯狂/生气

12. do better in=be better at 在......方面做得更好

13. be in good health 身体健康

14. report card 成绩单

15. sound /feel /smell /taste /look 是连系动词,一般只能跟adj.做表语

16. sound like/feel like/smell like/taste like/look like

听起来像…/感觉像…/闻起来像…/尝起来像…/看起来像…+sb./sth.

17. get… over 克服;恢复;原谅

18. open up 打开/展开/开发/揭露

19. care for 照料;照顾;意愿;计较

20. have a party for sb. 为某人举行一次聚会

21. end-of-year exam=final exam 期末考试

1.have a surprise(surprising) party for sb 为某人举行一个惊喜的聚会

2.get/be mad at sb/sth 对…生气/恼火

3.on Friday evening 在星期五晚上

4.not …any more /any longer 不再

5.first of all =at first 首先

6.at the bus stop 在公共汽车站

7.pass sth on to sb 把…传给…

60

8.be good at =do well in +名词/代词/doing sth.在…方面做得好

9.be better at =do better in +名/代/doing sth. 在…方面做得更好

10.be hard-working 勤奋的

11.I’m sorry to hear that 听到你那样说我感到难过

12.have a cold 感冒

13. be/keep in good health = keep/stay healthy 保持健康

14.end-of-year exams 年终考试

15.report card 成绩单

16.get +形容词 变得…(例get tired/get angry/get nervous)

17.be surprised to do sth 对做某事感到惊讶

18.have a hard /difficult time +doing sth./with sth 在…方面很费时间/在…方面不顺利

19.get over …原谅/克服…

20.one’s own sth 某人自己的事物(my own work)

21.forget to do sth 忘记要做某事 forget doing sth 忘记已做某事

22.change one’s life 改变某人的生活

23.sound like +形容词 听起来…

24.open up one’s eyes to …开阔某人的视野

25.there times a day 一天三次

26.both…and…两者都…most of …在…中的绝大多数

27.between…and…在…与…之间

28.feel lucky 感到幸运的

29.some of …在…中的一些 one of …在…中之一

30.return to…回到…

31.return sth to …把…还给…=give back sth to…

22.

Unit 5 If you go to the party,you’ll have a great time!

1. at the party 在晚会上

2. ask sb. to do sth. 请某人做某事

3. stay at home 呆在家

4. half the class/students 一半学生

5. get injured 受伤

6. have a great time 玩得高兴

7. take …away 运走,取走

8. all the time=always 一直,始终

9. make a living 谋生

10. in order to do… 为了做某事

11. have a party 举行聚会

12. go to college 上大学

13. be famous for… 因……而著称

14. make money 挣钱

15. in fact 事实上

16. laugh at… 嘲笑

17. too much… 太多(修饰不可数名词)

18. too many… 太多(修饰可数名词复数)

61

19. much too+形容词/副词 太……

20. get exercise 锻炼

注意:(exercise当“锻炼”是不可数名词;而当“操”“练习”是可数名词)

21. travel around the world 周游世界

22. work hard 努力工作

23. wear jeans 穿牛仔裤

24. let ... in 允许……进入,嵌入

25. get an education 获得教育

26. take… away 拿开,拿走

1.If you go to the party ,you will have a good time .(if引导的条件状语从句,时态是 “主将

从现”)

2.go to the party 去参加聚会

3.have a great/good time =have fun = enjoy oneself 玩得高兴,过得愉快 4.let sb in 让某人进入

5.take away 拿走

6.all the time = always 总是,一直

7.make a living 谋生

8.in order to …为了…

9.study for …test 为…考试而学习

10.stay at home 呆在家里

11.Let’s have/make it …让我们约定在…

12.half the class 一半的学生

13.end-of-year party 年终晚会

14.go to college 上大学

15.travel around the world 环游世界

16.make a lot of money 赚很多钱

17.get an education 受教育

18.in fact 事实上

19.a professional soccer player 一名职业足球运动员

20.play sports for a living 以运动为谋生

21.get injured 受伤

22.be famous for…因…而出名

23.too much+不可数名词/too many+可数名词复数 太多的…

24.much too +形/副词 实在太…

25.so much +不可数名词 /so many +可数名词复数 如此多…

26.the past tense of … …的过去式

Unit 6 How long have you been collecting shells?

1. raise money 筹钱

2. collect stamps 集邮

3. run out of… 用尽

4. by the way 顺便说一下

5. on the way to.. 在…的路上

6. be interested in 对…感兴趣

7. more than=over 超过

62

8. fly kites 放风筝

9. three and a half years =three years and a half 三年半

10. a pair of skates/shoes/glasses/trousers/jeans 一双滑冰鞋/一双鞋/一副眼镜/一条裤子/牛仔裤

? How much is a pair of skates/shoes/glasses/trousers/jeans?

= How much does a(this) pair of skates/shoes/glasses/trousers/jeans cost?

? How much are the skates/shoes/glasses/trousers/jeans?

= How much do the skates/shoes/glasses/trousers/jeans cost?

1.现在完成进行时态结构:sb have/has been +ving

2.for+时间段 已…了

3.since +时间点/从句(一般过去时)自从…起

4.How long …多久 (对for/since提问)

5.a pair of …一双、一条、一副…(eg: a pair of glasses/skates/shoes/pants ) 6.raise…for 为…筹集..(raise money for charity 为慈善机构募捐)

7.the first …to do sth 做某事的第一个人 (eg She is the first student to get to school .)

8.the whole five hours =all the five hours 整整五个小时

9.three and a half years =three years and a half 三年半

10.Sb.run out of sth.某人用完了某物

11.thanks for sth /doing sth 谢谢你…

12.by the way 顺便说,顺便问一下

13.on my seventh birthday 在我第七个生日

14.be interested in sth /doing sth对…感兴趣

15.fly a kite 放风筝

16.finish doing sth 做完某事

17.the capital of … …的首都/省会

18.It was interesting for me to learn history. 学习历史对我来说很有趣.

19.more than =over 超过…,多于…

20.less than …少于…

21.the +比较级,the +比较级 越…,就越… eg: The more trees we plant , the more

beautiful our school is . 我们种的树越多,我们的学校就越美.

22.比较级+and+比较级 越来越…

23.far from …离…远

Unit 7 Would you mind turning down the music?

1. turn… down/turn… up 关小声/调大声音(电器)

2. turn… on/ turn …off 打开/关闭(电器)

3. move the bike 移动自行车

4. in a minute/right away/in no time 立刻,马上

5. be late for school/class=arrive late for school 上学/上课迟到

6. wait in line=stand in line 排队等候

7. cut in line=jump a queue 插队

8. get mad/annoyed 变得生气

9. happen to sb 发生在…身上

10. half an hour 半小时

11. at first 首先

12. at last=in the end=finally 最后

63

13. allow sb. to do /not to do sth. 允许某人做/不做某事

14. be allowed to do /not to do sth. 某人不被允许某人做/不做某事

15. in public 当众地;公开地;公然地

16. in public places 在公共场所

17. break the rule 不遵守规则

18. pick… up 捡起

19. put …out 熄灭

20. drop litter 扔垃圾

21. keep the voice down 控制声音

1.Would you mind doing sth? 你介意(反对)做某事吗?

<否定形式> Would you mind not doing sth.?

2.Could/Would you please do sth? 请你做某事,行吗?

<否定形式> Could/Would you please not do sth.?

3.turn on 打开

4.turn off 关掉

5.turn up 调高

6.turn down 调低

7.Not at all 不用谢

8.Not…at all 根本不,一点也不

9.right away=at once=right now=in a minute 马上,立刻

10.do the dishes 洗盘子

11.put on 穿上

12.take off 脱下;起飞

13.at a meeting 在开会

14.(That’s) no problem. 没问题

15.wait in line=join the line=stand in line 排队

16.cut/jump in line 插队

17.Sth. happen to sb. 某人发生某事

18.go back to…回到…

19.get annoyed 变得生气

20.stand in the subway door 站在地铁门口

21.welcome to…欢迎到…

22.the way to…去…的路

23.a bit + 形=a little + 形 一点…

24.a bit of +不可数名词=a little +不可数名词

25.wait for… 等候…

26.look up to sb. 尊重某人

27.look up 查寻;抬头看

28.keep…down压低声音

29.some time 一段时间 sometime 某时 sometimes 有时 some times 几次

30.close to=next to…靠近…

31.if possible 如果可能的话

32.put out 熄灭

33.take care=be careful 小心,当心

34.take care (not) to do sth. 小心(不要)做某事

64

35.take care of = look after 照看

36.pick up 拾起

37.give some suggestion 提建议

38.drop litter 扔垃圾

39.in an English-speaking country 在一个说英语的国家

40.in public places 在公共场所

41.break the rules 违反规定

42.one of the +最高级+复数名词 ….中的之一 eg: One of the most polite ways

Unit 8 why don’t you get her a scarf?

1. fall asleep 入睡

2. give… away 赠送;分发

3. rather than 宁愿…而不是,胜于

4. would do…rather than do 宁愿…不愿做

5. hear of… 听说

6. make friends with 和……交友

7. photo album 像册

8. too personal 太私人化

9. not interesting enough 不够有趣

10. make a special meal 做一顿特别的饭

11. an 8-year-old child 一个六岁的孩子

12. these days 最近

13. not…at all 根本不

14. different kinds of 不同种类

15. make her happy 使她高兴

16. someone else 别人(else总是后置)

17. improve English 提高英语

18. in different ways 以不同的方式

19. encourage sb to do 鼓励某人做

20. make progress 取得进步

21. take an interest in/be interested in 对……感兴趣

1.Let’s do sth. 让我们做…吧

2.Shall I/we do sth.? 我/我们做…行吗?

3.How/What about doing sth.? 做…怎么样?

4.Would you like to do sth.? 你想要做…吗?

5.Why don’t you do sth.?= Why not do sth.? 你为什么不做…呢?

6.What should I do? 我应当怎么做?

7.get/buy sb sth.= get/buy sth. for sb. 买某物给某人

8.That sounds good. 那听起来不错. (sound +形)

9.receive sth. from….=get sth. from… 从某人处收到某物

10.What a lucky guy !多幸运的小伙子!

11.leave school 毕业,离校

12.mouse老鼠----mice <复数>

13.a six-year-old child 一个6岁的孩子

14.too +形/副 +to do sth. 太…而不能…

15.these days 目前

65

16.all day 全天

17.named/called 被叫做…

18.give away 赠送

19.fall asleep 入睡

20.rather than +名/代/动词原形 宁愿…而不愿…

21.in different ways 用不同的方法

22.on stage 在舞台上

23.as +形/副(原级)+as …与…一样

24.make progress 取得进步

25.encourage sb. to do sth. 鼓励某人做某事 26.find out 找出

27.make friends with…与…交朋友

28.the men’s/women’s competition 男/女子组比赛

29.across China = all over China 全中国

30.the Olympic Games = the Olympics 奥运会

31.win the prize 获奖

32.have fun doing sth.=have fun with sth. 做…很愉快

Unit 9 Have you ever been to an amusement park?

1. take a ride 兜风

2. end up 结束

3. take a holiday/vacation 度假

4. all year round 全年

5. such as 例如

6. a zoo called/named… 一个叫做……的动物园

7. during the daytime 在白天

8. wake up 醒来

9. wake somebody up 唤醒/叫醒某人

10. have a great/nice/wonderful/great time 玩得高兴

11. a wonderful place to take a holiday/to visit 一个度假/游览的好地方

12. an English-speaking country 一个讲英语的国家

13. be asleep=fall asleep 睡着

14. Three quarters of the population are Chinese. 四分之三的人口是中国人(谓语动词用复数形式)

15. What’s the population of China? 中国的人口是多少?(不用how much提问)

16. the population of China is 1.3 billion 中国的人口是13亿。(谓动词用单形式)

1.have/has been to…去过…

2.have/has never been to…从未去过…

3.have/has gone to…去了…

4.have/has been a /an +职业+for…./since…成为一名…已经…了. 5.have/has been in/at +地点+for…./since… 在某处已经…了.

6.have/has been doing sth. +for…./since… 做某事已经…了.

7.since +时间点/从句(过去时) 自…..以来 for +时间段 已经….了. 提问用:How long 多久

8.Me too.我也如此.

9.Me neither. 我也不是这样.

66

10.space museum 航空博物馆

11.end up 结束

12.one…the other…. 一个…另一个…

13.on board 在船上

14.take a ride 兜风

15.take different rutes 沿不同线路

16.improve English 提高英语

17.How do you spell…? 怎样拼写…?

18.need to do sth. 需要做某事

19.such as…例如

20.take lessons 上课

21.start to do sth./doing sth. 开始做某事

22.think about 考虑

23.think of 想出;认为

24.take a holiday 度假

25.in Southeast Asia 在东南亚

26.have some problems (in) doing sth. 做某事有困难

27.three quarters of…四分之三的…

28.all year round 一年到头

29.be asleep 睡着的

30.be awake 醒着的

31.at night 在晚上

32.in the day 在白天

33.something to eat/drink 一些吃/喝的东西

34.choose to do sth. 选择做某事

17. 35.population 人口

Unit 10 It’s a nice day, isn’t it?

1. feel like doing=want to do sth. 想做某事

2. like to do sth./like doing sth. 喜欢做某事

3. would like to do=want to do 想要做某事

4. like sb. to do 想要某人做某事

5. feel like sth. 觉得像….

6. have a hard/difficult time doing sth 费了很大劲做某事

7. have problem doing sth 做某事有困难

8. have fun doing sth 乐于做某事

9. need to do sth. 需要做某事(主语是人,强调主动)

10. need doing=need to be done 需要被…(主语是物,强调被动) 例如:I need to do my homework The bike needs mending/reparing

11. thank-you note 感谢信

12. look through 浏览

13. get along/ on well 相处得好

14. at least 至少

15. at most 最多

16. be careful =look out 当心,小心

17. be careful to do/not to do sth. 小心做/不做某事

67

18. cross a street =go across a street 过街(穿过表面)

19. go through 穿过(空间/房间/森林等)

20. go past 经过/路过

21. come along 跟着来

22. say in a low/loud voice 小声地/大声地说

23. something cost+钱= something is worth+钱 某物值多少钱

24. a high/low temperature 高/低温

25. the price is high/low 价格高/低

26. do/try one’s best to do sth. 努力/尽力做某事

1.look through 浏览

2.in an elevator 在电梯里

3.on the weekend 在周末

4.by +时间 到…为止

5.have a good day 度过愉快的一天

6.Sth. cost sb. some money 某物花某人多少钱

7.Sb. pay some money for sth. 某人为某物付多少钱

8.Sb. spend some money on sth. 某人花多少钱在某物上

9.Sb. spend some time (in) doing sth.= It takes sb. some time to do sth. 某人花费多少时间做某事

10.tell sb. about sth. 告诉某人有关…

11.be friendly to sb. 对某人友好

12.enjoy doing sth. 喜欢做某事

13.at least 至少

九年级英语

Unit1

1. by + doing 通过……方式 如:by studying with a group

by 还可以表示:“在…旁”、“靠近”、“在…期间”、“用、”

“经过”、“乘车”等

如:I live by the river. I have to go back by ten o’clock.

The thief entered the room by the window.

The student went to park by bus.

2. talk about 谈论,议论,讨论 如:The students often talk about movie after class. 学生

们常常在课后讨论电影。

talk to sb. === talk with sb. 与某人说话 3. 提建议的句子:

①What/ how about +doing sth.?

如:What/ How about going shopping?

②Why don’t you + do sth.? 如:Why don’t you go shopping?

③Why not + do sth. ? 如:Why not go shopping?

④Let’s + do sth. 如: Let’s go shopping

⑤Shall we/ I + do sth.? 如:Shall we/ I go shopping?

4. a lot 许多 常用于句末 如:I eat a lot. 我吃了许多。

5. too…to 太…而不能 常用的句型 too+adj./adv. + to do sth.

68

如:I’m too tired to say anything. 我太累了,什么都不想说。

6. aloud, loud与loudly的用法

三个词都与"大声"或"响亮"有关。

①aloud是副词,重点在出声能让人听见,但声音不一定很大,

常用在读书或说话上。通常放在动词之后。aloud没有比较级

形式。如: He read the story aloud to his son.

他朗读那篇故事给他儿子听。

②loud可作形容词或副词。用作副词时,常与speak, talk,

laugh等动词连用,多用于比较级,须放在动词之后。如:

She told us to speak a little louder. 她让我们说大声一点。

③loudly是副词,与loud同义,有时两者可替换使用,但往往

含有令人讨厌或打扰别人的意思,可位于动词之前或之后。如:

He does not talk loudly or laugh loudly in public. 他不当众大声谈笑。

7. not …at all 一点也不 根本不 如:

I like milk very much. I don’t like coffee at all. 我非常喜欢牛奶。我一点也不喜欢咖啡。

not经常可以和助动词结合在一起,at all 则放在句尾

8. be / get excited about sth.=== be / get excited about doing sth.

=== be excited to do sth. 对…感兴奋 如:

I am / get excited about going to Beijing.===

I am excited to go to Beijing. 我对去北京感到兴奋。

9. ① end up doing sth 终止做某事,结束做某事 如:

The party ended up singing. 晚会以唱歌而结束。

② end up with sth. 以?结束 如:

The party ended up with her singing. 晚会以她的歌唱而告终。

first of all 首先

. to begin with 一开始

later on 后来、随

also 也、而且(用于肯定句)常在句子的中间

either 也(用于否定句)常在句末

too 也 (用于肯定句) 常在句末

12. make mistakes 犯错 如:I often make mistakes. 我经常犯错。

make a mistake 犯一个错误 如: I have made a mistake.

我已经犯了一个错误。

13. laugh at sb. 笑话;取笑(某人) 如:Don’t laugh at me!

不要取笑我!

14. take notes 做笔记,做记录

15. enjoy doing sth . 喜欢做?乐意做? 如:

She enjoys playing football. 她喜欢踢足球。

enjoy oneself 过得愉快 如:He enjoyed himself. 他过得愉快。

16. native speaker 说本族语的人

17. make up 组成、构成

18. one of +(the+ 形容词比较级)+名词复数形式 …其中之一

如: She is one of the most popular teachers.

她是最受欢迎的教师之一。

69

19. It’s +形容词+(for sb. ) to do sth. (对于某人来说)做某事…

如:It’s difficult (for me ) to study English.

对于我来说学习英语太难了。

句中的it 是形式主语,真正的主语是to study English

20. practice doing 练习做某事 如:

She often practice speaking English. 她经常练习说英语。

21. decide to do sth. 决定做某事 如:

LiLei has decided to go to BeiJing . 李雷已经决定去北京。

22. unless 假如不,除非 引导条件状语从句

如:You will fail unless you work hard..假如你不努力你会失败。

I won’t write unless he writes first. 除非他先写要不我不写

23. deal with 处理 如:I dealt with a lot of problem.

24. worry about sb./ sth. 担心某人/ 某事

如:Mother worried about his son just now.

妈妈刚才担心他的儿子。

25. be angry with sb. 对某人生气 如:

I was angry with her. 我对她生气。

26. perhaps === maybe 也许

27. go by (时间) 过去 如: Two years went by. 两年过去了。 see sb. / sth. doing 看见某人正在做某事 强调正在发生

see sb. / sth. do 看见某人在做某事 如:

如: She saw him drawing a picture in the classroom.

她看见他正在教室里画画。

29. each other 彼此

30. regard… as … 把…看作为…. 如:

The boys regarded Anna as a fool. 这些男孩把安娜看成傻瓜。

too many 许多 修饰可数名词 如:too many girls

too much 许多 修饰不可数名词 如:too much milk

much too 太 修饰形容词 如:much too beautiful

32. change… into… 将…变为…

如:The magician changed the pen into a book.

这个魔术师将这本书变为一本书。

33. with the help of sb. == with one’s help 在某人的帮助下

如:with the help of LiLei == with LiLei’s help

在李雷的帮助下

34. compare … to … 把…与…相比

如:Compare you to Anna, you are lucky.

你和安娜相比,你是幸运的。

instead 代替 用在句末,副词(字面上常不译出来)

instead of sth. / doing sth. 代替,而不是 用在句中,动词

如:Last summer I went to Beijing. This year I’m going to Shanghai instead.去年夏天我去北京, 今年我将要去上海。

I will go instead of you. 我将代替你去。

He stayed at home instead of going swimming.

他呆在家里而不是去游泳。

70

Unit2

1. used to do sth. 过去常常做某事

否定形式: didn’t use to do sth. / used not to do sth.

如:He used to play football after school. 放学后他过去常常踢足球。

Did he use to play football? Yes, I did. No, I didn’t.

He didn’t use to smoke. 他过去不吸烟。

2. 反意疑问句 ①肯定陈述句+否定提问 如:Lily is a student, isn’t she?

Lily will go to China, won’t she?

②否定陈述句+肯定提问 如:

She doesn’t come from China, does she?

You haven’t finished homework, have you?

③提问部分用代词而不用名词 Lily is a student, isn’t she?

④陈述句中含有否定意义的词,如:little, few, never, nothing, hardly等。其反意疑

问句用肯定式。 如:

He knows little English, does he? 他一点也不懂英语,不是吗?

They hardly understood it, did they?他们几乎不明白,不是吗?

3. play the piano 弹钢琴

①be interested in sth. 对…感兴趣

②be interested in doing sth. 对做…感兴趣

如:He is interested in math, but he isn’t interested in speaking

English. 他对数学感兴趣,但是他对说英语不感兴趣。

感兴趣的,指人对某事物感兴趣,往往主语是人

有趣的,指某事物/某人具有趣味,主语往往是物

6. still 仍然,还

用在be 动词的后面 如:I’m still a student.

用在行为动词的前面 如:I still love him.

7. the dark 天黑,晚上,黑暗

8. 害怕 be terrified of sth. 如:I am terrified of the dog.

be terrified of doing sth. 如:I am terrified of speaking.

9. on 副词,表示(电灯、电视、机械等)在运转中/打开,

其反义词off. with the light on 灯开着

10. walk to somewhere 步行到某处 walk to school 步行到学校

11. spend 动词,表示“花费金钱、时间”

①spend…on sth. 在某事上花费(金钱、时间)

②spend…doing sth. 花费(金钱、时间)去做某事 如:

He spends too much time on clothes. 他花费太多的时间在衣着

He spend 3 months building the bridge.他花费了三个月去建这座桥。

Pay for 花费

如:I pay 10 yuan for the book. 我花了10元买这本书。

12. take 动词 有“花费”的意思 常用的结构有:

take sb. … to do sth. 如:It takes me a day to read the book.

take … to do sth.

13. chat with sb. 与某人闲聊 如:I like to chat with him.

71

我喜欢和他聊天。

14. worry about sb./ sth. 担心某人/某事 worry 是动词

be worried about sb./sth. 担心某人/某事 worried 是形容词

如:Don’t worry about him. 不用担心他。

Mother is worried about her son. 妈妈担心他的儿子。

15. all the time 一直、始终

16. take sb. to + 地方 送/带某人去某个地方 如:

A person took him to the hospital. 一个人把他送到了医院。

Lui took me home. 刘把我送回了家。(home 的前面不能用to)

hardly adv. 几乎不、没有

hardly ever 很少

hardly 修饰动词时,通常放在助动词、情态动词之后,实义

助动词/情态动词+hardly

hardly + 实义动词 如:

I can hardly understand them. 我几乎不能够明白他们。

I hardly have time to do it. 我几乎没有时间去做了。

18. miss v. 思念、想念、 错过

19. in the last few years. 在过去的几年内 常与完成时连用 如:

I have lived in China in the last few years.

在过去的几年内我在中国住。

20. be different from 与…不同

21. how to swim 怎样游泳

不定式与疑问词连用:动词不定式可以和what, which, how, where, when 等引导的

疑问句连用,构成不定工短语。如:

The question is when to start. 问题是什么时候开始。

I don’t know where to go. 我不知道去哪。

make sb./ sth. + 形容词 make you happy

make sb./ sth. + 动词原形 make him laugh

23. move to +地方 搬到某地 如:I moved to Beijing last year.

24. it seems that +从句 看起来好像…… 如:

It seems that he has changed a lot. 看起来他好像变了许多。

help sb. with sth. 帮某人某事

help sb. (to ) do sth. 帮某人做某事

She helped me with English. 她帮助我学英语。

She helped me (to) study English。 她帮助我学习英语。

26. fifteen-year-old 作形容词 15岁的

fifteen-year-olds 作名词指15岁的人

fifteen years old 指年龄 15岁 如:

a fifteen-year-old boy 一个15岁的男孩

Fifteen-year-olds like to sing. 15岁的人喜欢唱歌。

I am fifteen years old . 我是15岁。

27.支付不起 can’t /couldn’t afford to do sth.

can’t / couldn’t afford sth.

如:I can’t/couldn’t afford to buy the car.

I can’t/couldn’t afford the car. 我买不起这个辆小车。

72

28. as + 形容词./副词+as sb. could/can 尽某人的…能力 如:

Zhou run as fast as her could/can. 她尽她最快的能力去跑。

29. get into trouble with 遇到麻烦

30. in the end 最后

31. make a decision 下决定 下决心

32. to one’s surprise 令某人惊讶 如:

to their surprise 令他们惊讶 to LiLei’s surprise令李雷惊讶

33. take pride in sth. 以…而自豪 如:

His father always take pride in him. 他的爸爸总是以他而自豪

34. pay attention to sth. 对…注意,留心 如:

You must pay attention to your friend. 你应该多注意你的朋友。

35. be able to do sth. 能做某事 如:

She is able to do it. 她能够做到。

36. give up doing sth. 放弃做某事 如:

My father has given up smoking. 我爸爸已经放弃吸烟了。

37.不再 ①no more == no longer 如:

I play tennis no more/ longer.我不再打网球。

②not …any more == not …any longer 如:

I don’t play tennis any more/longer. 我不再打网球。

38. go to sleep 入睡

Unit3

1.语态:

①英语有两种语态:主动语态和补动语态

主动语态表示是动作的执行者

被动语态表示主语是动作的承受者

Cats eat fish. (主动语态)猫吃鱼。

Fish is eaten by cats. (被动语态)鱼被猫吃。

②被动语态的构成

由“助动词be +及物动词的过去分词”构成

③被动语态的用法

当我们不知道谁是动作的执行者,或者没有必要指出谁是动作的执行者,或者只需强调动作的承受者时,要用被动语态。

2. allow sb. to do sth. 允许某人做某事(主动语态)如:

Mother allows me to watch TV every night. 妈妈允许我每晚看电视。

73

be allowed to do sth. 被允许做某事(被动语态)如:

LiLy is allowed to go to Qinzhou. 莉莉被允许去钦州。

3. get their ears pierced 让/使(别人)做某事 get sth. done(过去分词)

have sth. done 如:

I get my car made. == I have my car made. 我让别人修好我的车

4. enough 足够

形容词+enough 如:beautiful enough 足够漂亮

enough+名词 如:enough food 足够食物

enough to 足够…去做… 如:

I have enough money to go to Beijing. 我有足够的钱去北京。

She is old enough to go to school.她够大去读书了。

stop doing sth. 停止做某事 Please stop speaking.请停止说话。

stop to do sth. 停止下来去做某事 Please stop to speak.

请停下来说话。

6. 看起来好像…sb. seem to do sth. = it seems that +从句

He seems to feel very sad.

It seems that he feels very sad. 他看起来好像很伤心。

7. 系动词不能独立作谓语,要和表语一起构成谓语。常用的连系动词有:look, feel, be,

become, get, turn, smell, taste, stay(保持), kept等。连系动词除be 和become 等少数词可接名词作表语外,一般都是接形容词。 如:

They are very happy. He became a doctor two years ago. She felt very tired.

8. 倒装句:

由so+助动词(be/do/will/have)/情态动词+主语 意为:…也是一样

She is a student. So am I. 她是一个学生,我也是。

She went to school just now. So did I . 她刚才去学校了,我也是

She has finished the work. So have I . 她已经完成了工作,我也完成了。

She will go to school. So will he. 她将去学校,他也是。

9. yet 仍然,还 常用在否定句或疑问句当中

10. stay up 熬夜如:I often stay up until 12:00pm.我经常熬夜到12点。

11. clean up 打扫 整理 如:

I have cleaned up the bedroom. 我已经打扫完了卧室。

12. 程度副词:

always总是 usually经常 sometimes有时 never从不

如:I am always/usually/sometimes/never late for school.

我总是/经常/有时/从不上学迟到。

13. 曾经做某事:

Do you ever get to school late? Yes, I do. No, I don’t.

Have you ever got to school late? Yes, I have. No, I haven’t.

14. go shopping(去购物), go fishing(去钓鱼), go swimming(去游泳), go boating(去划船),

go hiking(去登山), go trekking(去徒步)

15. be strict with sb. 对某人严厉 如:

Mother is strict with her son. 妈妈对她的儿子很严厉。

16. take the test 参加考试

74

pass the test 通过考试

fail a test 考试失败

17. the other day 前几天

18. agree 同意 反义词 disagree不同意 动词

agreement 同意 反义词 disagreement 不同意 名词

18. keep sb/ sth. +形容词 使某人/某物保持…. 如:

We should keep our city clean.我们应该保持我们的城市干净。

19. both…and… +动词复数形式

如: Both Jim and Li Ming play bastketball.

20. learn (sth.) from sb. 向谁学习(什么) 如:

Jim learnt English from his English teacher. 吉姆向他的英语老师学习英语

有机会做某事

have a chance of doing sth. 有机会做某事

如:I have an opportunity to go to Beijing. I have a chance of going to Beijing.

22. at present 目前

23. at least 最少 at most 最多

24. 花费 take ,cost, spend , pay

sth. take (sb.) time to do sth. It took (me) 10days to read the book.

sth. cost (sb.) …… The book cost (me) 100yuan.

sb. spend … on sth. She spent 10days on this book.

sb. spend …doing sth. She spent 10days reading this book.

sb. pay … for sth. She paid 10yuan for this book.

25. have +时间段+off 放假,休息 如:have 2 days off

26. reply to 答复某人 如:She replayed to MrGreen.

同意某事 如:I agree with that idea.

agree to sb. 同意某人的意见 如:I agree to LiLei.

28. get in the way of 碍事,妨碍 如:

Her social life got in the way of her studies. 她的社会生活妨碍了她的学习。

29. success n. succeed v. successful adj. successfully adv.

30. think about 与think of 的区别

①当两者译为: 认为、想起、记着时,两者可互用

I often think about/ of that day. 我经常想起那天。

②think about 还有“考虑”之意 ,think of 想到、想出时两者不能互用 At last, he thought of a good idea. 最后他想出了一个好主意。

We are thinking about going Qinzhou. 我们正在考虑去钦州。

对… 热衷, 对…兴趣

be serious about doing 如:She is serious about dancing. 她对跳舞热衷。

be serious about sth. 如:She is serious about him. 她对他感兴趣。

32. practice doing 练习做某事 She often practice speaking English.

33. care about sb. 关心某人 如:Mother often care about her son.

也 用于句中

either也 用于否定句且用于句末

too 也 用于肯定句且用于句末

I am also a student. 我也是一个学生

I am a student too. 我也是一个学生。

75

I am not a student either. 我也不是一个学生。

Unit4

1. if 引导的非真实性条件状语从句 即 虚拟语气

通过动词形式的变化来表示说话人对发生的动作或存在的状态

所持的态度或看法的动词形式称为语气,虚拟语气表示说话人所说的

话不是事实,而是一种祝愿,建议或是与事实相反的假设等。

If 引导的条件状语从句分为真实和非真实条件句,非真实条件

即:(从句)if +主语+动词过去式(be 动词用 一般过去时

(主句) 主语+would+ 过去将来时

如:If I had time, I would go for a walk.

如果我有时间,我就会去散步。(事实上我现在没有时间)

If I were you, I would take an umbrella.

假如我是你的话,我会带上雨伞。(事实上我不是你)

I would say no if someone asked me to be in a movie. 假如有人请我当电影演员,我会表示拒绝。(事实上瑞没有人请我当电影演员)

2. pretend to do sth. 假装做某事 I pretended to sleep just now.

pretend +从句 假装… I pretended that I fell asleep.

3. be late for 迟到 如:

I am late for work/ school/ class/ party.

4. a few 与 a little 的区别,few 与 little 的区别

⑴ a few 一些 修饰可数名词

a little 一些 修饰不可数名词 两者表肯定意义

如:He has a few friends. 他有一些朋友。

There is a little sugar in the bottle. 在瓶子里有一些糖。

⑵ few 少数的 修饰可数名词

little 少数的 修饰不可数名词 但两者表否定意义

如:He has few friends. 他没有几个朋友。

There is little sugar in the bottle.在瓶子里没有多少糖。

5. still 仍然,还 用在be动词之后,行为动词之前 如:

I am still a student.我仍然是个学生 I still love him.我仍然爱他。

6. hundred, thousand , million, billion (十亿)词前面有数词或several

一词时要不能加s ,反之,则要加s 并与of 连用, 表示数量很

多 如:several hundred/ thousand/ million/ billion people

几百/千/百万/十亿人 hundreds of trees 上百棵树

7. what if + 从句 如果…怎么办 , 要是… 又怎么样 如:

What if she doesn’t come? 要是她不来怎么办?

What if LiLei knows? 如果李雷知道了怎么办?

8. add sth. to sth. 添加…到… 如: I added some sugar to water. 我把糖添加到水里。

9. 系动词与形容词连用 get nervous 变得紧张

feel shy 觉得害羞 look friendly 看起来友好

10. too +形/副+to do sth. 太…而不能 如:

76

I’m too tired to stand. 我太累了而不能站。

11. help with sth. 如:They help with this problem.

help sb. do. 如:They help you relax. 他们帮助你放松

12. in public 在公共场所 如:

Don’t smoke in public. 请不要在公共场所吸烟。

13. energetic adj. 活力的 如:She is a energetic girl. 她是一个活力的女孩。

energy n. 活力 如:She has lots of energies. 她有活力。 14. 叫…做某事

ask sb. not to do sth.叫…不要做某事

tell sb. to do 告诉…做某事

tell sb. not to do sth. 告诉…不要做某事

如:Teacher asked me to clean the classroom.

Teacher asked me not to clean the classroom.

15. start doing == start to do. 开始做某事 如:

He started speaking/ to speak. 他开始说话。

16. borrow sth. from sb. 从某人那里借来某物 如:

I borrowed a book from Lily. 我从莉莉那里借来一本书。

17.wait for sb.等某人 如:I am wait for him. 我正在等他。

18. introduce sb. to sb. 把某人介绍给某人 如:

I introduced Lily to Anna. 我把莉莉介绍给安娜。

19. invite sb. to do 邀请某人做某事 如:

Lily invited me to go to her home for supper. 莉莉邀请我去她家吃晚饭。

20. have dinner/ supper 吃晚饭

have lunch/ breakfast 吃午餐、吃早餐

21. plenty of 修饰不可数名词,也可以修饰可数名词 许多 如:

They have plenty of food/ apples. 他们有许多的食物/苹果。

22. 给某人某物 give sth. to sb. 如: give an apple to me

give sb. sth. give me an apple 给我一个苹果

23. get along with sb. 与…相处 如:

Do you get along well with your friends? 你和你的朋友相处得好吗?

24. would rather do sth. than do sth. 表示愿做某事而不愿做某事 如:

I would rather walk than run.

25. whole 整个 26. in fact 事实上

27. let sb. down 让某人失望 如:

Don’t let your mother down. 不要让你的妈妈失望。

28. come up with sth. 提出 想出 如:He came up with a good idea. 他提出了一个好主意。 catch up with sb. 追上 赶上 如: Lily caught up with Anna. 莉莉赶上了安娜。

29. have experience doing 在做某事有经验 如:

I have experience teaching Chinese. 我在教英语方面有经验。

30. come out 出版,出来 如:The magazine comes out once a week. 这种杂志每周出一次。

31. by accident 偶然地,无意之中 如:

Last week I cut my finger by accident. 上个星期我不小心割到自己的手指。

32. hurry to do 匆忙… I hurry to call the police. 33. more than 超过

34. offer sb. sth. 给某人提供某物

宾语从句 宾语从句在复合句中作主句的宾语。

77

由连接词+ 主语+ 谓语 构成

常由下面的一些词引导:

㈠由that 引导 表示陈述意义 that 可省略

He says (that) he is at home. 他说他在家里。

㈡由if , whether 引导 表示 一般疑问意义(带有是否、已否、对否等)

I don’t know if / whether Wei Hua likes fish.

我不知道韦华是否喜欢鱼。

㈢由 连接代词、连接副词(疑问词) 引导 表示特殊疑问意义

Do you know what he wants to buy? 你知道他想要买什么吗?

㈣从句时态要与主句一致

当主句是一般现在时,从句根据情况使用任何时态

He says (that ) he is at home. 他说他在家里。

I don’t know (that) she is singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。

She wants to know if I have finished my homework.

她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。

Do you know when he will be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来?

当主句是一般过去时,从句应使用过去某时态(一般过去时,

过去进行时,过去将来时,过去完成时)

He said (that) he was at home. 他说他在家里。

I didn’t know that she was singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。

She wanted to know if I had finished m homework.

她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。

Did you know when he would be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来?

Unit5

现在完成时态

⑴由have/ has + 过去分词

⑵表示过去发生或已经完成的某一动作对现在造成的影响或结果

常与already, just , yet , ever, never 连用

Have you finished your work yet?你完成了你的工作了吗?

Yes, I have. I have just finished it. 是的。我刚刚完成了。

I have already finished it . 我已经完成了。

Have you ever been to China? 你曾经去过中国吗?

No, I have never been there. 没有,我从来也没有去过。

⑶①表示过去已经开始,持续到现在的动作 或状态和表示过去某一时刻延续到现在(包括现在在内)的一段时间的状态连用如:(for + 时间段,since + 时间点,或过去某一动作, 以及how long )

②注: 非延续性动词在现在完成 时态中不能和for, since 引导的表示一段时间的状语的肯定句连用。

应转为相应的延续性动词 如:buy---- have die---- be dead join ---- be in borrow----- keep leave---- be away

I have bought a pen.------ I have had a pen for 2 weeks.

The dog has died.------- The dog has been dead since last week.

⑷①have (has) been to + 地点 去过某地 已经回来

②have (has) gone to + 地点 去了某地 没有回来

78

③have been in + 地点 一直呆在某地 没有离开过 如:

She has been to Shanghai. 她去过上海。(已经回来)

She has gone to Shanghai. 她去了上海。(没有回来)

She has been in Shanghai for 2 days.她呆上海两天了。(没有离开过上海)

1.情态动词must, may , might, could, may , can’t表示推测含义与用法后面都接动词原形,都可以表示对现在情况的揣测和推断但他们含义有所不同

must 一定 肯定 (100%的可能性)

may, might, could有可能,也许 (20%-80%的可能性)

can’t 不可能,不会 (可能性几乎为零)

The dictionary must be mine. It has my name on it.

The CD might/could/may belong to Tony because

he likes listening to pop music.

The hair band can’t be Bob’s. After all, he is boy!

2. whose 谁的 疑问词 作定语 后面接名词

如:Whose book is this? This is Lily’s.

3. belong to 属于 如: That English book belongs to me.

当play 指弹奏乐器时,常在乐器前用定冠词 如:

play the guitar play the piano play the violin

当play 指进行球类运动时,则不用定冠词 如:

play football play basketball play baseball

5. if引导的条件状语从句,主句用一般将来时,

从句用一般现在时代替将来时 如:

If you don’t hurry up, you’ll be late.如果你不快点,你将会迟到

6. if you have any idea== if you know 如果你知道

7. on 关于(学术,科目)

8. try to do sth. 尝试做某事 如: I try to climb the tree. 我尝试爬树。

9. because of , because

because of + 名词/代词/名词性短语

because + 从句 如: I do it because I like it. 我做这件事是因为我喜欢。 I had to move because of my job. 因为工作的原因我得搬家。

10. own v.-owner n. listen v.-listener n. learn v.-learner n.

11. catch a bus 赶公车

neighbor 邻居 指人

neighborhood 邻居 指地区也可指附近地区的人

13. local 当地的 如:local teacher 当地的教师

14. noise n. 噪音 是个可数名词 noises

15. call the police 报警 如:Quick! Call the police! 快!叫警察!

16. anything strange 一些奇怪的东西

当形容词修饰something, anything, nothing, everything等不定代词时,放在这些词的后面

17. there be sb./ sth. doing 如: There is a cat eating fish.

There must be something visiting our home.

18. escape from …从哪里逃跑出来 如:

He escaped from the burning building. 他从燃烧的大概中逃出来。

19. an ocean of + 名词 极多的,用不尽的 如:an ocean of energy.

20. unhappy 不高兴的 反义词 happy 高兴的

79

21. final adj. 最后的 finally adv. 最后地

22. dishonest 不诚实的 反义词 honest 诚实的。

23. get on 上车 get off 下车

24. use up 用光、用完 如:They have used up all the money. 他们已经用完了所有的钱。

25. attempt to do 试图 如:

The boys attempted to leave for Beijing. 男孩子们试图想去北京。

26. wake 动词 唤醒 常用的词组:wake up 意为醒来 如:

Please wake me up at 8 o’

clock. 请在8点钟叫醒我。

look for 寻找 指过程

find 找 指结果 如:

I am looking for a pen. 我正在找一支笔。(指找的过程)

I found my pen just now. 我刚刚找到了我的笔。(指找的结果)

hear 听 指听的结果

listen 听 指听的过程 如:

Did you hear ? 你听到了吗?(指听的结果,听或没听到)

I often listen to the music. 我经常听音乐。(指听的过程)

29. try one’s best to do sth. 尽某人的最大努力去做某事 如:

He tried his best to run. 他尽他的最大努力去跑。

30. 名词所有格 名词所有格的构成有两种形式

①是在名词后面加 ’s 或是以s结尾 的名词,只在名词的后面加 ’

如:Ann’s book 安的书, our teachers’ office我们老师们的办公室

注:双方共有的所有格,只在后面一个名词加’s, 如:

Lily and Lucy’s father 莉莉和露西的爸爸(她们的爸爸是同一个人)

②有…of …介词短语表示无生命东西的所有格 如:

a picture of my family 我家人的相片

有时也有’s表示无生命的东西的所有格 如:

today’s newspaper, the city’s name

Unit 6

定语从句 参看课本P143

动词 更喜欢 宁愿

prefer sth. 更喜欢某事 I prefer English. 我更喜欢英语。

prefer doing/ to do 宁愿做某事 I prefer sitting/ to sit.我宁愿坐着。

prefer sth to sth. 同…相比更喜欢… I prefer dogs to cats.

与猫相比我更喜欢狗。

prefer doing to doing 宁愿做某事而不愿做某事

I prefer walking to sitting. 我宁愿走路也不愿坐着。

2. along with 伴随… 同… 一道

I will go along with you. 我同你一道去。

I sing along with music. 我伴随着音乐唱歌。

3. dance to sth. 随着…跳舞

She likes dancing to the music. 她喜欢随着音乐而跳舞。

4. different kinds of 各种各样different kinds of clothes 各种各样的衣服

5. music n. 音乐 musician n. 音乐家 musical

6. take … to … 带…去…. 如:

My father often takes me to the park. 我的爸爸经常带我去公园。

80

Please take this box to my office. 请拿这个盒子到我的办公室。

7. remind sb. of sb./sth. 提醒 使…记起….

This song reminds him of his mother. 这首歌使他记起了他的妈妈。

8. clear adj. 清楚的,清澈的 clearly adv. 清楚地

9. be important to sb. 对…重要

be important for sb. to do. 做某事对某人很重要

10. unfortunately adv. 不幸运地 fortunately adv. 幸运地

11. look for 寻找

My pen is lost. Could you help me look for it?

我的笔丢了。你能帮我找一下吗?

12. though == although 作连词 虽然,尽管

放在句子中间/句首,不能和but 连用

Though it was very late, he went on working. 虽然很晚了,但他还在工作

Mr. Smith , though he was young, did it very well.

史密斯先生虽然年轻,却做得很好。

13. fun n. 有趣 funny adj. 有趣的

14. be sure to do 一定做某事 肯定做某事 如:

It is sure to snow. 肯定要下雪 Be sure not to forget it. 千万不要忘记呀!

15. known adj. 有名的 著名的 know v. 知道 认识

16. on display 展览

17. over the years 很多年来,常与现在完成时连用如:

Over the years, they’ve planted many trees on the hills. 多年来他们已在山上种植了许多树。

18. energy n. 活力 energetic adj. 有活力的

19. most of … …的大多数

20. keep healthy 保持健康

21. get together 聚在一起

22. discuss v. 讨论 discussion n. 讨论

23. be bad for sth. 对…有坏处的

be bad for doing sth. 做…有坏处

24. for example 例如

25. take care of === look after 照顾 关心 如:

She often takes care of / looks after her son.

26. stay away from 远离… 如:

Stay away from me , I have a cold. 请远离我,我得了感冒

27. to be honest 老实说 如:

To be honest I really like flowers. 老实说我真的很喜欢花。

28. dislike 不喜欢 反义词 like 喜欢

29. fisherman 渔夫 复数形式 fishermen

30. photography n. 摄影 photograph n. 照片 相片

photographer n. 摄影师

31. be in agreement 意见一致 常与介词on /about连用如:

They are in agreement on that question. 他们对那个问题意见一致。

32. even if 甚至

33. mainly adv. 主要地 首要地 main adj. 主要的

81

Unit 7 tired 累的 tiring 令人疲惫的

bored 讨厌 boring 令人厌烦/讨厌的

excited 兴奋的 exciting 令人兴奋/激动的

amazed 惊讶的 amazing 令人惊讶的

2. education n. 教育 educational 有教育意义的

3. 想要做…:would like to do 想要…:would like sth.

常用的句型有:

What would you like to do? 你想要做什么?

I would like to visit GuiLin. 我想去参观桂林。

What would you like ? 你想要什么?

I would like some tea. 我想来些茶。

Would you like to go to my party? 你来不来参加我的晚会?(表邀请) Yes, I’d love/ like

to . No, thanks.

Would you like some tea or coffee? 你是要点茶还是咖啡?

Yes, I’d love/ like. No. thanks.

Where would you like to visit/ go? 你想去哪呢?(本单元的重点句型)

4. go on vacation 去度假

go on a trip 去旅行 go on a picnic 去野炊

5. hope to do 希望做某事 I hope to go to Beijing. 我希望去北京。

hope (that) + 从句 希望….

I hope that I can go to Beijing.我希望我能去北京。

I hope (that) she can pass the test.我希望她能通过考试。

6. I love places where the people are friendly. 我喜欢人们友好的地方。

where 关系副词,引导定语从句

where引导定语从句修饰表示地点的先行词如:the place, the city等

That is the school where I studied 10 years ago.

那就是我10年前所就读的学校。

7. 不定代词 参看课本P141

注:形容词必须放在不定代词、不定副词的后面

8. consider doing考虑做某事

I am considering changing my job. 我正在考虑换工作。

9. cost (sb.) 钱、时间 The book cost me 10 yuan 这本书花了我10元。

10. in general 一般来说, 大体上, 通常

11. be supposed to do 应该做…. === should 如:

Scientists are supposed to know a lot. 科学家们应该知道更多。

12. take a trip 去旅行

13. provide sb. with sth 供应某人某物=== provide sth for sb.

如:They provide us with water.

They provide water for us.

14. how far 问路程 多远

how old 问年龄 多少岁

how long 问时间 多久 多长

how often 问频率 多久一次

15. be away 离开 如: I was away 2days ago. 我两天前离开了。

82

I will be away for a few days. 我将离开一些天。

16. inexpensive adj. 不贵的 反义词 expensive adj. 贵的 17. let sb. do 让某人做某事 Let me help you.让我帮你吧。

let sb. not do 让某人不要做某Let us not laugh. 让我们不要笑了。

18. in the future 将来

She will a good mother in the future. 在将来她将会是一个好妈妈。

19. 用to 表示 “的”有:

answers to question 问题的答案 the key to the door 这扇门的钥匙

20. as soon as possible 尽可能的快

21. continue doing == go on doing 继续做某事 如:

She continued singing. == She went on singing. 她继续唱歌。

22. according to 根据

23. be willing to do 愿意做某事 如:

I am willing to help you. 我愿意帮你。

24. on the other hands 另一方面

25. hold on to sth. 保持,不要放弃

Please hold on to my hand. 不要放开我的手。

26. come true 实现 如: My dream have come true. 我的梦实现了。

Unit 8

短语动词小结

常见短语动词结构有下面几种:

1.动词+副词 如:give up 放弃 turn off 关掉 stay up 熬夜

这种结构有时相当于及物动词,如果其宾语是代词,就必须放在动

词和副词之间,如果是名词,则既可插在动词和副词之间,也可放

在短语动词后。

2. 动词+介词 如:listen of 听 look at 看 belong to 属于

这种结构相当于及物动词,后面跟宾语。

3. 动词+副词+介词 如:come up with 提出,想出 run out of 用完,耗尽

4. 动词+名词(介词) 如:take part in参加 catch hold of 抓住

1.cheer (sb.) up 使(某人)高兴、振作 如:cheer me up 使我高兴

clean up 打扫 clean-up n. 打扫

2. homeless adj. 无家可归的 a homeless boy 一个无家可归的男孩

home n. 家

3. hand out 分发 hand out bananas

give out 分发 give out sth to sb. 分….给某人

give up doing 放弃… give up smoking 放弃吸烟

give away 赠送 捐赠 give away sth. to …. give away money to kids give sb. sth. 给某人某东西 give me money 给我钱

give sth. to sb. 给某人某东西 give money to me 给我线

4. sick adj. 生病的 作表语、定语

ill adj. 生病的 作表语 ,不能作定语

5. volunteer to do v. 志愿效劳、主动贡献

volunteer n. 志愿者

6. come up with 提出 想出 === think up 想出

catch up with 赶上 追上

83

7. put off doing 推迟做某事 put on 穿上 (指过程) put up 张贴

8. write down 写下 记下

9. call up 打电话 make a telephone call 打电话

10. set up 成立 建立

The new hospital was set up in 2000. 这座医院是在2000年成立的。

11. each 每个 各自的 强调第一个人或事物的个别情况 常与of 连用

every 每个 每一个的 一切的 则有“全体”的意思不能与of 连用

12. put …to use 把… 投入使用,利用

They put the new machine to use. 他们把新机器投入使用 帮助某人做某事 help him (to) study help sb. with sth. 帮助某人做某事 help him with English

help do 帮助做某事 help study

14. plan to do 计划做某事 plan + 从句

I plan to go to Beijing. === I plan (that) I will go to Beijing. 我计划去北京。

15. spend … doing 花费…做… I spent a day visiting Beijing.

我花了一天的时间去参观北京。

spend… on sth. 花费…在… I spent 3 years on English.

16.not only … but (also) … 不但… 而且… 用来连接两个并列的成分

(1)引导以 not only …but (also)… 开头的句子往往引起部分倒装。

因此 ⑴Not only do I feel good but (also)…. 是倒装句。也是说得要

把前面的句子中的助动词或者是情态动词放在主语的前面。如:

①Not only can I do it but (also) I can do best.

我不仅能做到而且做得最好。

⑵Not only…but (also)… 接两主语时,谓语动词随后面的主语人称和数的变化 也就是就近原则 如:

①Not only Lily but (also) you like cat. 不仅莉莉而且你也喜欢猫。

②Not only you but (also) Lily likes cat. 不仅你而且莉莉喜欢猫。

常见的就近原则的结构有:

Neither… nor…即不…也不… (两者都不)

Neither you nor I like him. 我和你都不喜欢他。

Either… or… 不是…就是… (两者中的一个)

Either Lily or you are a student.

Not only …but (also)…

There be

参加 (指参加团体、组织) 如:join the Party 入党

take part in 参加 (指参加活动) 如:

take part in sports meeting 参加运动会

①run out of == use up 用完 用尽

I have run out of money.== I have used up money. 我已经用完了钱。

②run away 逃跑 The monkey has run away from the zoo.

这只猴子已经从动物园里逃跑了。

③run to + 地方 跑到某地

take after (在外貌、性格等方面)与(父母等)相像

be similar to 与..相像

take after 相像 look after 照顾 take care of 照顾

84

20. work out 算出 结局

The situation worked out quite well. 情况的结局非常好

Have you worked out this math problem? 你已经算出这道数学问题了吗?

21. hang out 闲荡 闲逛

I like to hang out at mall with my friends. 我喜欢和我的朋友一起去购物中心闲荡。

22. be able to do 能 会 be unable to do 不能 不会

23. thank you for doing 谢谢做某事 如: thank you for helping me 谢谢做帮助我

24. for sure 确实如此,毫无疑问

You don’t have money. That’s for sure. 你没有钱,这是毫无疑问的。

25. fill… with… 使…充满… 用…填充…

She filled the bowl with water. 她用水填满碗。

26. like prep. 像…

27. help sb. out 帮助…做事,解决难题(摆脱困境)

I can’t work out this math problem. Please help me out.

我不能算出这道数学问题,请你帮我解决。 火车

train v. 训练

train sb. to do. 训练某人做某事

She trains her dog to fetch things. 她训练她的狗去取东西。

29. at once == right away 立刻 马上 如: Do it at once. 马上去做。

I’ll go there at once/ right away. 我马上去那里。

有一天 (指将来/过去)

some day 有一天(指将来) 如: One day I went to Beijing. 有一天我去了北京。 Some day I’ll go to Beijing. 有一天我将去北京。

31. specially adv. 特意地 专门地 特别地 special adj. 特别的

32. donation n. 捐赠物 donate v. 捐赠 赠送

33. part of speech 词性 词类

34. disabled adj. 肢体有残疾的 disable v. 不能

Unit9

1. 被动语态

(1). 被动语态表示句子的主语是谓语动词所表示的动作承受者。

(2). 被动语态基本结构:be+及物动词的过去分词

(如果是不用物动词,其过去分词应带有相应的介词)

(3). 被动语态中的be 是助动词,有人称、数和时态的变化。

一般现在时被动语态为:am/is/are+过去分词

一般过去时被动语态为:was/were+ 过去分词

与情态动词连用的被动语态:情态动词+ be + 过去分词

(4). 被动语态中动作的发出者或执行者做介词by的宾语,放在句

末,by 表示“由,被”的意思

如何理解被动语态?

为取胜更清晰、更深刻地理解被动语态的含义,可以将主动语态和被动语态的句子结构进行比较。

主动语态: 主语+ 谓语动词 + 宾语 + 其他成分

85

2. 本单元要掌握的句型 见课本P69 中的Grammar Focus

3. invent v. 发明 inventor n. 发明家 invention n. 发明 可数名词

4. be used for doing用来做…(是被动语态) 如:

Pens are used for writing. 笔是用来写的。 Pens aren’t used for eating. 笔不是用来吃的。

5. 给某人某样东西

give sth. to sb. 如:I gave a pen to him. 我给他一支笔。

give sb. sth. I gave him a pen. 我给他一支笔。

6. all day 整天

7. salty adj. 咸的 salt n. 盐

8. by mistake 错误地 如:

I took the umbrella by mistake. 我不小心拿错了雨伞。

9. make sb./sth. +形容词 使…怎么样 It made me happy. 它使我高兴

make sb./sth. +名词 让…做… It made me laugh. 它让我发笑

10. by accident 意外 偶然 I met her by accident at bus stop.

我在公共汽车站意外地见到了她。

11. not…until… 直到…才做… 如:

I didn’t go to bed until I finished my work. 我直到完成我的工作才去睡觉。

12. according to +名词 根据… 如: according to an legend

according to this article根据这篇文章 根据一个神话

13. over an open fire 野饮

14. leaf n. 叶子 复数形式 leaves

15. nearby adj. 附近的 如: the nearby river

16. fall into 落入 掉进 如:The leaf fell into the river. 叶子落入了河里。fall down 摔倒

如:She fell down from her bike.

她从她自行车摔倒了。

非常 adv. 与冠词a连用时,冠词a必须放在它的后面

如: quite a beautiful girl 一个漂亮的女孩

very 非常 adv. 与冠词a连用时,冠词a必须放在它的前面

如: a very beautiful girl 一个漂亮女孩

注:当不与冠词a 连用时,两者可以互用 如:

I am very happy.=== I am quite happy. 我非常高兴。

18. in the way 这样

表示外部因素引起人发自内心的欣慰和愉快

pleasant adj. 愉快 高兴 指天气、时间、旅行令人高兴愉快

please v. 使高兴 使同意

20. battery—operated adj. 电池控制的是名词+动词的运动分词构成的合成形容词

21. in the sixth century 在第6世纪

22. travel around 周游

23. more than === over 超过 如: more than 300 == over 300 超过300

24. including prep. 介词 包括 可以与名词和动名词连用

86

如: Six people, including a baby, were hurt. 6个人包括一个小孩受伤了。

25. have been played 被上演 是现在完成时的被动语态

现在完成时的被动语态的结构:have /has been +过去分词

26. be born 出生 He was born in Canada. 他在加拿大出生

27. safety n. 安全 safe adj. 安全的

28. knock into 撞上(某人)

29. divide sth. into … 将…划分成..

通常指将一个整体分成几个对应相对的部分 如:

Let’s divide ourselves into 4groups. 让我们把我们自己划成4组。

30. since then 自从那以后 常与完成时 态连用 如:

Since then, I have left Beijing. 自从那以后,我已经离开了北京。

Unit10

1. 过去完成时

(1) 构成:由助动词had + 过去分词 构成

否定式:had not + 过去分词 缩写形式:hadn’t

(2) 用法 过去完成时表示在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成了的动作。

(3) 它所表示的时间是“过去的过去”。

①表示过去某一时间可用by, before 等构成的短语来表示

②也可以用when, before, after 等引导的时间状语从句来表示

③还可以通过宾语从句或通过上下文暗示。

When I got there, you had already eaten you meal. 当我到达那里时,你已经开始吃了。 By the time he got here, the bus had left. 到他到达这里时,汽车已经离开了

2. by the time 直到…时候

指从过去某一点到从句所示的时间为止的一段时间 如:

By the time we got to his house, he had finished supper.

在我们到达他就已经吃完了晚饭。

3. 英语中表示“把某物遗忘在某处”常用 leave + 地点

而不是forget+地点 如:Unluckily, I left my book at home

. 不幸的是,我把书忘在家里了。

4. close v. 关 adv. 接近地 靠近地 closed adj. 关的

5. come out 出来

6. on time 按时 准时 既不早也不迟 in time 及时 指在时限到来之前

7. luckily adv. 幸运地 lucky adj. 幸运的 luck n. 好运

8. give sb. a ride 让某搭便车 如:

He often gives me a ride to school. 他经常让我搭便车去学校。

9.only just 刚刚好、恰好

10. go off (闹钟)闹响 The alarm went off just now. 刚才警钟响了。

11. break down 坏掉

12. fool n. 傻子 呆子 v. 愚弄 欺骗 如: He is a fool. 他是一个呆子。 We can’t fool our teach. 我们不能欺骗我们的教师。(动词)

13. show up 出现 出席 She didn’t show up last night. 昨晚她没有出现

14. invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人做某做事 如:

My friend invited me to watch TV. 我的朋友邀请我看电视。

15. set off 激起 出发 set up 建立

①so … that 如此…以致于

87

引导结果状语从句,so后面接形容词、副词.

②so that作“为了”时,引导目的状语从句,从句常出现情态动词,

作结果状语从句时,从句中一般不用情态动词 。

如:She got up early so that she could catch the bus.

为了能赶上车,她起得很早。(目的状语从句)

She was so sad that she couldn’t say a word. 她悲伤得一句话也说不出来。(结果状语从句)

17. flee from 从…逃跑 避开 如:They fled from their home. 他们从他们的家里逃了出来。 使人非常激动,使人非常紧张

thrilled adj. 指某人感到激动或感到紧张

thrilling adj. 指某事物使人心情激动

19. get married 结婚

20. convince v. 使信服 convincing adj. 令人信服的

21. land v. 着落

22. be late for 迟到

23. a piece of 一片/块/张 如: a piece of paper/ bread 一张纸/ 一块面包

Unit11

1.宾语从句 宾语从句在复合句中作主句的宾语。

①由连接词+ 主语+ 谓语 构成

常由下面的一些连接词引导:

②由that 引导 表示陈述意义 that 可省略

He says (that) he is at home. 他说他在家里。

③由if , whether 引导 表示一般疑问意义(带有是否、已否、对否等)

I don’t know if / whether Wei Hua likes fish. 我不知道韦华是否喜欢鱼。

④由连接代词、连接副词(疑问词) 引导 表示特殊疑问意义

Do you know what he wants to buy? 你知道他想要买什么吗?

⑤从句时态要与主句一致

当主句是一般现在时,从句根据情况使用任何时态

He says (that ) he is at home. 他说他在家里。

I don’t know (that) she is singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。

She wants to know if I have finished my homework.

她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。

Do you know when he will be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来?

当主句是一般过去时,从句应使用过去某时态(一般过

去时,过去进行时,过去将来时,过去完成时)

He said (that) he was at home. 他说他在家里。

I didn’t know that she was singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。

She wanted to know if I had finished m homework.

她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。

Did you know when he would be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来?

2. get v. 得到、买、到达

3. make a telephone call 打电话

4. save money 省钱、存钱

5. ①问路常用的句子:

Do you know where …is ?

88

Can you tell me how can I get to …?

Could you tell me how to get to …?

②Can/Could/Will/Would you please tell me sth. 表示十分客气地询问事情

③Could you tell me how to get to the park?

请你告诉我怎么才能去邮局好吗?中的how to get to the park

是疑问词与动词不定式连用,用作宾语,但不是宾语从句,可是

相当于how I can get to the park(宾语从句)如:

I don’t know how to solve the problem. == I don’t know how I can solve the problem.我不知道如何解决这个问题

Can you tell me when to leave? ==

Can you tell me when I ill leave? 你能告诉我什么时候离开?

日常交际用语:

take the elevator / escalator to the … floor.乘电梯/自动扶梯到…楼

turn left / right === take a left / right 向左/ 右转

go past 经过 go straight 向前直走

7. next to 旁边、紧接着 如:Lily is next to Ann. 莉莉就在安的旁边。

8. between … and… 在…和…之间

如: Lily is between Ann and Tom. 莉莉就在安和汤姆的之间。

9. decide to do 决定做… She decided to go to have lunch. 她决定去吃午餐。

decide v. decision n. make a decision 做个决定

10. Is that a good place to hang out? 那是不是一个闲荡的好地方?

中的to hang out修饰前面名词place,不定式作定语.

如:There are something to eat. 这有吃的东西。中的to eat修饰代词something,作定语.

11. kind of +adj./ adv. 译为“有点、一点”如: She is kind of shy. 她有点害羞。

12. expensive 贵的 反义词 inexpensive 不贵的

13. crowded 拥挤的 反义词 uncrowded 不拥挤的

14. take a vacation == go on a vacation 去度假

dress up 打扮 dress up as 打扮成..

如:He wanted to dress up as Father Christmas. 他想要打扮成圣诞老人。

在海滩上 的介词用 on

17. politely adv. 有礼貌地 polite adj. 有礼貌的

18. depend on sth / doing / 从句 根据、依靠、依赖、决定于

Living things depend on the sunlight.生物对阳光有依赖性。

We can’t depend on his answer. 我们不能根据他的回答。

That depends on how you did it. 那决定于你怎样做这件事。

19. prefer动词 更喜欢 宁愿 常用的结构有:

更喜欢某事 I prefer English. 我更喜欢英语。

prefer doing/ to do 宁愿做某事 I prefer sitting/ to sit.我宁愿坐着。

prefer sth to sth. 同…相比更喜欢… I prefer dogs to cats. 与猫相比我更喜欢狗。 prefer doing to doing 宁愿做某事而不愿做某事

I prefer walking to sitting. 我宁愿走路也不愿坐着

prefer to do rather than do 宁愿做某事而不愿做某事

I prefer to work rather than be free. 我宁愿工作而不愿闲着。

另一方面

21. 把…借给某人lend sb. sth. = lend sth.to sb. 如:

89

Lily lent me her book. == Lily lent her book to me .莉莉把她的书借给了我。

22. such as

23. I’m sorry to do sth. 对做某事我觉得很抱歉、伤心。

24. in a way 在某种程度说

25. in order to do 为了做… 表目的 如:

He got up early in order to catch the first bus.

他起早床,是为了赶上头班公共汽车。 26. 等级/同级比较:as…as , not as/so…as

①as + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as

表示“和…一样的…”“…和…一样的…”

如: He works as hard as we. 他工作和我们同样努力。

②否定式:not as + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as

== not so + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as

He doesn’t work as / so hard as we. 他工作没有我们那样努力。

27. hand in 上交

Unit12

1. be supposed to do . 应该 如: We are supposed to stop smoking. 我们应该停止吸烟。

知识拓展 表示应该的词有:should, ought to ,be supposed to

2. shake hands 握手 shake 本意是“摇动、震动”

3. You should have asked what you were supposed to wear.

你本应该问清楚怎么样穿才得体。中的“should have asked”是

“情态动词+现在完成时”表示过去本应该做某事,事实上没有做

如:She should have gone to Beijing. 她本应该去了北京。(没有去)

4. be relaxed about sth. 对某事随意、不严格 如:

They are relaxed about the time. 他们对时间很随意。

5. pretty adv. 相当,很=very She is pretty friendly. 她相当友好。

adj. 美丽的 She is a pretty girl.她是一个美丽的女孩。

6. make plans to do == plan to do. 打算做某事 如:

She has made plans to go to Beijing.==She has planed to go to Beijing.

7. drop by 访问 看望 拜访 串门

We just dropped by our friends’ homes.我们刚刚去朋友家串门。

8. on time 按时

9. after all 毕竟 终究 如: You see I was right after all.你看,毕竟还是我对了。

10. invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人做某事 如:

Lily invited me to have dinner.莉莉请我吃晚饭。

11. without 没有

12. around the world == all over the world 全世界

13. pick up 捡起 挑选 如:He picked up his hat. 他捡起他的帽子。

14. start doing == start to do 开始做某事 如

He started reading.== He started to read. 他开始读。

15. point at 指向

16. stick v. 剌 截 n. 棒,棍

chopstick 筷子 是由chop(砍)+stick(棒)合成,通常用复数形式:chopsticks

17. go out of one’s way to do 特意,专门做某事 如:

90

He went out of his way to make me happy. 他特意使我高兴。

18. make mistakes 犯错误(复数)make a mistake 犯错误(一个)

19. be different from 与…不同 如:

Chinese food is different from theirs. 中国菜与他们的不同. 20. get/be used to sth. 习惯于…

get/be used to doing 习惯于…

be used to do 被用于做…

be used for doing 被用于做…

used to do 过去常常做… 如:

I wash clothes everyday. But I’m used to it.

我每天都洗衣服,但我习惯了

I am used to washing clothes. 我习惯于洗衣服了。

The knives are used to cut things. 小刀被用来切东西。

The knives are used for cutting things. 小刀被用来切东西。

She used to watch TV after school. 她过去放学后常常看电视。

21. 我发现要记住每一样事是困难的。

I find it difficult to remember everything.

常见的形式宾语有: find / think + it/them +形容词 to do sth. 如:

I think it hard to study English.

22. cut up 切开 切碎 如:Let’s cut up the water melon. 让我们切开这个西瓜吧。

23. make a toast 敬酒

24. crowd v.挤满 其形容词和过去式及过去分词都是:crowded

25. set n. 一套 v. 设置

26. can’t stop doing 忍不住做某事 I can’t stop laughing. 我忍不住笑

27. make faces 做鬼脸

28. face to face 面对面

29. learn…by oneself 自学 如: I learn English by my self. 我自学英语。

新目标九年级英语期末复习手册

Unit1-15重点知识梳理

Unit 1

一:知识点

1.Check in : 在旅馆的登记入住。 Check out: 在旅馆结账离开。

2.By: ①通过?..方式(途径)。例:I learn English by listening to tapes.

②在?..旁边。例:by the window/the door

③乘坐交通工具 例:by bus/car

④在??之前,到??为止。例:by October在10月前

⑤被 例:English is spoken by many people.

3.how与what的区别:

how通常对方式或程度提问,意思有:怎么样 如何,通常用来做状语、表语。 what通常对动作的发出者或接受者提问,意思为 什么,通常做宾语,主语。 How is your summer holiday? It’s OK.(how表示程度 做表语)

91

How did you travel around the world? I travel by air.

What do you learn at school? I learn English, math and many other subjects.

4.aloud, loud ,loudly 均可做副词。

aloud 出声地 大声地 多与read 、speak连用

例如:read aloud 朗读 speak aloud说出声来

loud 大声地 响亮地 loudly 高声地 多指喧闹声和不悦耳的声音。

5. voice 指人的嗓音也指鸟鸣。 sound 指人可以听到的各种声音。 noise 指噪音、吵闹声

6. find + 宾语 + 宾补(名词 形容词 介词短语 分词等)

例:I find him friendly. I found him working in the garden.

We found him in bed. He found the window closed.

7. 常见的系动词有: ①是:am 、is、 are ②保持:keep、 stay

③ 转变:become、 get、 turn ④ ??起来 feel、 look、 smell、 taste、 sound

8. get + 宾语 + 宾补(形容词 过去分词 动词不定式) 使某种情况发生

例:Get the shoes clean. 把鞋擦干净 Get Mr. Green to come. 让格林先生进来

I want to get my bike repaired. 我想去修自行车

You can’t get him waiting. 你不能让他老等着

9. 动词不定式做定语

①与所修饰的名词构成主谓关系

The next train to arrive was from New York. He is always the first to come.

②与所修饰的名词构成动宾关系

I have nothing to say. I need a pen to write with.

I need some paper to write on. I don’t have a room to live in.

10. practice , fun 做名词为不可数名词 11. add 补充说 又说

12. join 加入某团体 并成为其中一员 attend 出席参加会议或讲座

join in与take part in指参加到某项活动中去。

13.all、 both、 always以及every复合词与not连用构成部分否定。其完全否定为:all---none, both---neither, everything---nothing, everybody---nobody.

14.be afraid of害怕 be afraid to害怕 be afraid that恐怕担心,表示委婉语气

15.either ①放在否定句末表示“也” ②两者中的“任一”

③either?or? 或者?或者.?引导主语部分,谓语动词按照就近原则处理

16.complete完成,是个较正式的词,后不能接动名词 finish指日常事物的完成

17.a,an 与序数词连用表示“又一”,“再一”。

例:Please give me a second apple. There comes a fifth girl.

18.have trouble/difficult/problem (in) doing?.. 干?..遇到麻烦,困难

19.unless 除非,如果不,等于“if not”本身就表示否定,引导条件状语从句,主句为将来时,条件状语从句用一般现在时表示将来。

例:My baby sister doesn’t cry unless she’s hungry.

=My baby sister doesn’t cry if she isn’t hungry.

Unless you take more care, you’ll have an accident.如果你不多加小心的话,你会出事的。

20.instead:adv 代替,更换。

例:We have no coffee, would you like tea instead? 我们没有咖啡了,改喝茶好吗? Stuart was ill, so I went instead. 斯图尔病了,所以换了我去。

instead of 作为某人或某事物的替换

例:Let’s play cards instead of watching TV.

92

Give me the red one instead of the green one.

21.spoken 口头的,口语的。 Speaking 讲话的,说某种语言的。

二,短语:

1.by making flashcards 通过做单词抽认卡 2. ask?for help 向某人求助

3.read aloud 朗读 4.that way (=in that way) 通过那种方式

5.improve my speaking skills 提高我的会话技巧

6.for example (=for instance)例如 7.have fun 玩得高兴

8.have conversations with friends 与朋友对话

9.get excited 高兴,激动

10.end up speaking in Chinese 以说汉语结束对话

11.do a survey about? 做有关?的调查 12.keep an English notebook 记英语笔记

13.spoken English (= oral English) 英语口语 14.make mistakes 犯错误

15.get the pronunciation right 使发音准确

16.practise speaking English 练习说英语 17.first of all 首先

18.begin with 以?开始 19.later on 随后

20.in class在课堂上 21.laught at 嘲笑

22.take notes 记笔记 23.enjoy doing 喜欢干?

24.write down 写下,记下

25.look up (v + adv) 查找,查询 26.native speakers 说本族话的人

27.make up 编造,虚构,化妆,打扮 28.around the world 全世界

29.deal with 对待,处理,解决 30.worry about (be worried about) 担心,担忧

31.be angry with 生某人的气 32.stay angry 生气

33.go by 消逝 34. regard?as? 把?当做?

35.complain about/of 抱怨 36. change?into? 把?变成? (= turn into)

37.with the help of 在?的帮助下 38. compare?to (with)? 把?和?作比较

39.think of (think about) 想起,想到 40.physical problems身体上的问题

41.break off 中断,突然终止 42. not?at all 根本不,全然不

三,句子

1. How do you study for a test? 你怎样为考试做准备?

2. I have learned a lot that way. 用那种方法,我已经学到了很多东西。

3.It’s too hard to understand the voice. 听懂那些声音太难了。

4.Memorizing the words of pop songs also helped a little.记流行歌曲的词也起作用。

5. Wei Ming feels differently. 卫明有不同的感受。

6.He finds watching movies frustrating. 他觉得看电影让人感到沮丧.

7.She added that having conversations with friends was not helpful at all.

她又说和朋友对话根本没用。

8.I don’t have a partner to practice English with. 我没有搭档一起练习英语。

9.Later on, I realized that it doesn’t matter if you don’t understand every word.随后,我认识

到听不懂每个词并没有关系。

10.It’s amazing how much this helped. 我惊异于这些方法竟如此有用。

11.My teacher is very impressed. 给老师留下了深刻的印象。

12.She had trouble making complete sentences. 她很难造出完整的句子。

13.What do you think you are doing? 你在做什么?

14.Most people speak English as a second language. 英语对于大多数人来说是第二语言。

15.How do we deal with our problem? 我们怎样处理我们的问题?

93

16.It is our duty to try our best to deal with each challenge in our education with the help of our teachers. 在老师的帮助下尽我们最大的努力来应对挑战是我们的责任。

He can’t walk or even speak.他无法走路,甚至无法说话

Unit 2

一. 知识点

1. used to 过去常常做某事,暗指现在已经不存在的动作或状态. 后跟动词原形.

否定形式为: didn’t use to 或 usedn’t to 疑问形式为: Did?use to?? 或 Used?to?? be/get used to 习惯于, to 为介词.

2. wear 表示状态. put on 表示动作. dress + 人 给某人穿衣服.

3. on the swim team on 是?的成员,在?供职.

4. Don’t you remember me? 否定疑问句.

Yes, I do. 不, 我记得. No, I don’t 是的, 我不记得了.

5. 反意疑问句:

① 陈述部分的主语为 this, that, 疑问部分主语用it; 陈述部分主语用 these, those, 疑问部分用they 做主语.

例: This is a new story, isn’t it? Those are your parents, aren’t they?

② 陈述部分是 there be 结构, 疑问部分仍用 there

例: There was a man named Paul, wasn’t there?

③ I am 后的疑问句, 用aren’t I

例: I am in Class 2, aren’t I?

④ 陈述部分与含有 not, no, never, few, little, hardly, seldom, neither, none 等词时,疑问部分用肯定. 例: Few people liked this movie, didn’t they?

但陈述句中若带有否定前缀或后缀的单词时, 这个句子仍视为肯定, 后面仍用否定. 例: Your sister is unhappy, isn’t she?

⑤ 陈述部分的主语若为不定式或 V-ing 短语, 疑问部分主语用it.

例: To spend so much money on clothes is unnecessary, isn’t it?

⑥ 陈述句中主语是 nobody, no one, everyone, everybody 等指人的不定代词时,疑问部分用they做主语; 若陈述部分主语是 something, anything, noting, everything 等指事物的不定代词时, 疑问部分用it 做主语.

例: Nobody says one word about the accident, do they?

Everything seems perfect, doesn’t it?

⑦ 当主语是第一人称I时, 若谓动为think, believe, guess 等词时, 且其后跟宾丛,这时疑问句部分的人称, 时态要与宾语从句保持一致, 同时还要考虑否定转移.

例: I don’t think he can finish the work in time, can he?

⑧ 前面是祈使句, 后用 will you? (let’s 开头时, 后用shall we?)

6. be terrified of 害怕的程度比 be afraid of 深.

7. miss: ① 思念, 想念 例: I really miss the old days. ② 错过, 未中, 未赶上, 未找到. 例: It’s a pity that you miss the bus.

8. no more (用在句中)=not?any more (用在句尾) 指次数;

no longer (用在句中)=not?any longer (用在句尾) 指时间.

9. right: ① adj. 正确的, 对的, 右边的② n. 右方, 权利③ adv. 直接地.

10. It seems that Yu Mei has changed a lot. = Yu Mei seems to have changed a lot.

11. afford + n. /pron. afford + to do 常与can, be able to 连用.

例: Can you afford a new car?

The film couldn’t afford to pay such large salaries.

94

12. as well as 连词, 不但?而且? 强调前者. (若引导主语, 谓动与前者在人称和数上一致

例: Living things need air and light as well as water. 生命不仅需要水, 还需要空气和阳光.

13. alone = by oneself 独自一人. lonely 孤独的, 寂寞的.

14. in the last/past + 一段时间 during the last/past + 一段时间 与现在完成时连用.

15. die (v.) dead (adj.) death (n.) dying (垂死的)

二. 短语

1. be more interested in 对?更感兴趣.2. on the swim team 游泳队的队员.

3. be terrified of 害怕.4. gym class 体操课.5. worry about. 担心.

6. all the time 一直, 总是7. chat with 与?闲聊8. hardly ever 几乎从不

9. walk to school = go to school on foot

take the bus to school = go to school by bus

10. as well as 不仅?而且 11. get into trouble 遇到麻烦

12. make a decision 做出决定 13. to one’s surprise 使某人吃惊的是

14. take pride in 为?感到骄傲 15. pay attention to 留心, 注意

16. consist of 由?组成/构成. be made up of 由?组成/构成.

17. instead of 代替, 而不是 18. in the end 最后, 终于

19. play the piano 弹钢琴

三.句子

1.I used to be afraid of the dark. 我以前害怕黑暗.

2.I go to sleep with my bedroom light on. 我开着卧室的灯睡觉.

3.I used to spend a lot of time playing games with my friends.

以前我常常花很多时间和我的朋友们玩游戏.

4.I hardly ever have time for concerts. 我几乎没有时间去听音乐会.

5.My life has changed a lot in the last few years.

6.It will make you stressed out. 那会使你紧张的.

7.It seems that Yu Mei has changed a lot. 玉梅似乎变化很大.

Unit 3

一.知识点

1.被动语态的谓语动词形式: be的各种时态形式+v-ed

含情态动词的: can/may/must/should be + v-ed

2.get/have + n./pron. + v-ed 叫/让/请别人做某事(即使谋事被做)

例: I want to get my coat mended. 我要缝衣服.

3.allow sb to do sth 允许某人做? allow doing sth 允许做?

4.drive : ① 驾车,驾驶. ② 驱赶,驱使.

例: What drives them to rob the shop? 什么驱使他们去抢商店?

5.stupid silly foolish 三个词都有“蠢”的意思.但略有不同.stupid 程度最强,指智力 理解力 学习能力差. silly 指头脑简单,傻头傻脑,使人觉得可笑,带有感情色彩. foolish 尤其在口语中广泛使用.

例: He is stupid in learning math. 他学习数学很笨.

Stop asking such silly questions. 别再问这样傻的问题了.

You are foolish to throw away such a good chance. 你真蠢,丢掉这样一个好机会.

6.He doesn’t seem to have many friends.=It seems that he doesn’t have many friends. =He seems not to have many friends.

7.倒装句: So + be动词/助动词/情态动词+主语(前为肯定局) 表示与前面所述事实一致. 95

Neither/Nor + be动词/助动词/情态动词+主语(前为否定) 表示与前面所述事实一致. 例: He likes oranges. So do we. He doesn’t like oranges. Neither do we.

Tom can swim. So can John. Tom can’t swim. Neither can John.

So +主语+ be动词/助动词/情态动词 表示对前面事实的进一步确认.

例: Henry is very tired. So he is.(的确是)

He surfed Internet for two hours. So he did.(的确是)

They will win the game. So they will.(他们会的)

8.until 用于肯定句中,前面句子中的谓动必须是延续性的.

9.clean (v.) 打扫,清理 clean up 比较彻底地打扫,清理 clean out 打扫,清理地最彻底.

10.fail a test = fail in a test 考试不及格

11.be strict with+人. be strict in+事物.

例: The head teacher is strict with his students He is strict in the work.

12.the other day 前几天,不久前的一天.(用于过去时)

13.concentrate on? 全神贯注做?

例: This company concentrates on China market. 这家公司把重点放在中国市场上.

14. more?than?①与其说?不如说?; 比?更?

例: The man is more stupid than nervous.与其说那人紧张,倒不如说他愚蠢.

②在这一结构中,more做adj. 修饰名词,表示“比?多”

例:I have more books than you. 我的书比你的多.

15.volunteer ① n. 自愿者. ② v. volunteer to do sth. 自愿做?

例: We all volunteered to help in the old people’s home.我们都志愿到敬老院帮忙.

16.chance 指侥幸的,偶尔的机会,还可表示“可能性”

opportunity 指有利的时机,良机. 二者有时可以互换.

Have an opportunity to do sth 有做?的机会.

Don’t be too frustrated. You’ll have another opportunity to go to college next year. 别太沮丧了,你还有上大学的机会.

17. experience : ①可数名词 “经历,体验” 例: Please tell us something about your experiences.②不可数名词 “经验” 例: He is a man of rich experience.

③动词“经历” 例: She experienced lots of suffering.

18. off 不工作,不上班,不上学,不值班.

例: I think I’ll take the afternoon off. 我想下午歇班.

She is off today. 她今天休息.

I have three days off next week. 下周我有三天假.

19. reply 与 answer 两者有时可通用. reply比answer正式,一般指经过思考的.有针对性的,详细的回答,往往与to连用.answer是一般用语,可直接带宾语.

另外answer还有“应答”之意.如answer the door/telephone

20. get in the way (of)... 妨碍...

例: He never gets in others’ way. 他从不妨碍别人.

The bikes over there will get in the way of others. 自行车放在那里会妨碍别人的.

21. success (n.) successful (adj.) succeed (v.)

22. do does did 用在另一个动词前表示强调.

例: He does speak well. 他真的讲的很好. Do be quiet. 务必安静.

23. in the end = finally = at last 最后.

24. importance (n.) important (adj.)

96

25. be serious about 对?热忠/极感兴趣.

例: I’m serious about the problem.

To tell you the truth, I’m not serious about math at all.

26. only 处于句首,并后跟状语时,全句需要倒装.

例: Only then did he understand it. 只有到那时,他才明白.

Only in this way can we learn English well. 只有这样我们才能把英语学好.

Only when she came home, did he learn the news. 当她到家时,他才得知了这消息.

27. care about 关心,在乎,在意.

例: No one cares about others nowadays. 现在没人关心别人.

I don’t care about what he does. 我并不在意他干什么.

28. clothes 统指身上穿的各种服装,包括上衣,裤子,内衣等,做主语,谓语动词按复数处理.

clothing 不可数名词,是服装的总称,包括各种衣服,帽子,鞋袜等.做主语谓动按单三处理. cloth 布料.

二.短语

1. be allowed to do sth 被允许干? allow sb to do sth 允许某人干?

allow doing sth 允许干?

2. sixteen-year-olds = sixteen-year-old boys and girls 16岁的孩子

3. part-time jobs 兼职工作 4. a driver’s license 驾照

5. on weekends 在周末 6. at that age 在那个年龄段

7. on school nights 在上学期间的每个晚上 8. stay up 熬夜

9. clean up (相当与及物动词) 清扫 10. fail (in) a test 考试不及格

11. take the test 参加考试 12. the other day 前几天

13. all my classmates 我所有的同学 14. concentrate on 全神贯注于

15. be good for 对?有益 16. in groups 成群的,按组的

17. get noisy 吵闹(系表结构) 18. learn from 向某人学习

19. at present 目前,现在 20. have an opportunity to do sth 有做?的机会

21.English-English dictionary 英英词典 22. at least 至少

23.eight hours’ sleep a night 每晚8小时的睡眠

24. an old people’s home 敬老院 25. take time to do sth 花费时间干?

26. primary schools 小学 27. have?off 放假,休息

28. reply to 回答,答复 29. get in the way of 妨碍

30. a professional athlete 职业运动员 31. achieve one’s dreams 实现梦想

32. think about 思考,考虑 33. in the end 最后,终于

34. be serious about 对?热忠/极感兴趣

35. spend?on + n. spend ?(in) + v-ing 在?上花费时间/金钱

36. care about 关心,担心,在乎 37. agree with 同意?

三.句子

1. I don’t think twelve-year-olds should be allowed to get their ears pierced.

我认为不应该允许12岁的孩子穿耳孔.

2.They talk instead of doing homework. 他们聊天而不是做作业.

3.He is allowed to stay up until 11:00 pm. 允许他们熬到晚上11点.

4.We should be allowed to take time to do things like that more often.

我们应该被允许更加经常的花些时间多做这类事情.

5.What school rules do you think should be changed?

97

你认为学校的哪些制度应该改一改了?

6.The two pairs of jeans both look good on me. 这两条牛仔裤穿在我身上都适合.

7.The classroom is a real mess. 教室太脏了.

8.Should I be allowed to make my own decisions?

9.Only then will I have a chance of achieving my dream. 只有这样我才能实现我的梦想.

10.They should be allowed to practice their hobbies as much as they want.

应该允许他们对业余爱好想练多长时间就练多长时间.

11.We have nothing against running. 我们没有理由反对他跑步.

Unit 4

一、知识点

1、①give sb sth=give sth to sb

类似的词还有:pass、lend、show、write、send等

②buy sb sth=buy sth for sb

类似的词还有:make、draw、cook等

2、hundred 、thousand、mi11ion与数字连用不能用复数。

hundreds of、thousands of、mi11ions of中必须用复数。

3、look for寻找find找到、发现

find out指经过观察、探索、调查等弄清楚、弄明白。

discover 指发现那些客观存在而不为人所知的实情。如科学上的重大发现。

4、bring 带来 take 带走 fetch 去并拿来

5、talk to/with sb 同××说话。

tell 告诉, 分辨,辨别。

speak to sb 同××说话,做及物动词,后跟语言。

say 后跟名词、代词及宾语从句做宾语,着重强调说话内容。

6、What if ?? 如果??将会怎么样?(引导条件状语从句、疑问句)

eg What if she doesn’t come? 她要是不来怎么办?

What if your parent don’t agree? 如果你的父母不同意怎么办?

What if you should fall sick? 如果你生病了怎么办?

7、before 引导一个句子,为连词。后跟短语或名词等,则为介词。

8、food 表示食品种类,一种食物时,为可数名词

eg fried foods 油炸食品 break foods 早餐食品 frozen foods 冷冻食品

9、复数名词可表示一类食品(如 dogs)

a/an+单数可数名词可表示一类(如 a dog)

10、confident(adj.) confidence(n.)

11、What does/do ×× look like? 问相貌。

What’s ×× like? 问“品质性格”。

12、 give a speech 做演讲 have a speech听演讲 give a report 做报告

have a report 听报告

13、permission (n.) 允许,许可 permit (v.) 允许

14、plenty of 充足的,相当多的。修饰可数或不可数名词,只能用于肯定句。否定、疑问句中用 enough.

15、not??in the slightest=not??at all 根本不

16、company ①公司 ②一群人,一伙人 ③ 陪伴

17、get along (with)=get on (with)

①进行,进展 eg The business is getting along very well. 生意进展的很顺利。 98

How are you getting along with your English study? 你的英语学习进展的怎么样了? ②相处

eg Do you get along with your boss?= Do you and your boss get along? 你跟老板合得来吗?

I’m getting along very well with my classmates. 我和同学们相处得很好。

18、would rather ? than ? (= would ? rather than)宁愿,而不愿。

前后连接两个动词原形,否定形式为:would rather not do sth

①would rather ? than ? = prefer ? to ?

但prefer ? to ? 若连接两个动词,动词应为v-ing 形式。

eg He would rather jog than play football.=He prefers jogging to playing football.

②would rather 常单独使用,表示“宁愿做?”

eg He would rather watch TV at home.

③rather than = instead of 而不是

连接两个并列成分,前后对称。

eg I’d prefer to go to in summer rather than in winter.

I decided to write rather than telephone.

I like going out with you rather than with him.

She enjoys listening rather than speaking.

19、today、here、there、downstairs、upstairs、above、below做宾语修饰名词,放在名词之后 eg the weather today今天的天气 people here这里的人们the man downstairs楼下的那个男的 the passage below 下面的这段话

20、a little = a bit 修饰形容词、副词 a little = a bit of 修饰不可数名词

21、There is an English speech contest next month

用一般现在时表示将来,表示计划或安排好的动作,或者日历、时刻表的规定内容。

22、the rest 其余的,可指代可数或不可数名词。The other(s) 只能指代可数名词

23、come up with 提出或提出(答案、方法)等。类似于think of.

eg How would you come up with this idea? 你怎样想出这个注意的?

My brother is a person who often comes up with good idea.我弟弟是个常常能想出好点子的人

24、offer 提供 offer sb sth 给××?? offer to sb sth 主动提出干??

二、短语

1、give it to charity 把它捐给慈善机构 2、medical research 医学研究

3、What if ?? 如果?怎么样? 4、get nervous 紧张

5、take a big exam 参加大考 6、help with 有助于

7、in public 在公共场合 8、hardly ever 几乎不

9、the whole school 全校 10、without permission 为经许可

11、be(make) friends with 与?交朋友 12、ask one’s permission 请求××的允许

13、introduce?to? 把?介绍给? 14、invite?to do? 邀请?干?

15、social situations 社会环境 16、not? in the slightest 根本不,一点也不

17、right away 立刻,马上 18、all day 全天

19、be friendly to 对?友好 20、at lunch time 在午饭时间

21、a bit shy 有点害羞 22、English speech contest 英语演讲比赛

23、represent the class 代表班级 24、come top 名列第一(前茅)

25、let ? down 使?失望 26、come up with 提出、想出

27、be sure of + n./pron. 28、the rest of the students 其余的学生

99

be sure to do 相信? 29、have a lot of experience (in) doing sth

be sure +that 从句 在做某事方面有经验

30、deal with 对付,处理 31、come out 出版

32、give advice on? 在?方面提出意见、建议 33、by accident 偶然地,无意之中

34、hurry to do sth 匆匆忙忙干? 35、an internet friend 网友

三、句子

1、He doesn’t know if he should bring a present. 他不知道是否该带礼物。

2、You shouldn’t worry about what other people say.你不应该考虑别人说什么。

3、What will you do if you had a million dollars? 如果你有一百万美元,你会干什么?

4、If I were you, I ‘d take a small present.如果我是你,我会带一个小礼物。

5、I’m too tired to do well.我太累了,没考好。

6、Dogs can be a lot of trouble.狗会带来很多麻烦。

7、What are you like? 你是什么样的人?

8、I’d invite him/her to have dinner at my house.我会邀请他(她)到我家吃饭。9、You enjoy the company of other people.你喜欢别人的陪伴。

10、I feel nervous talking in front of many people.我在众人面前讲话时感到紧张。11、She always comes top in the school exams.她在学校的考试中总是名列前茅。

12、She doesn’t want to let her friends down.她不愿让朋友失望。

13、If I were you, I’ll get out of here.如果我是你,我会离开这里。

虚拟语气

一、词的语气

指我们平常说的说话人说话的口气。(在英语中,语气除了指语调以外,最主要的是通过动词发生变化而表示不同语气)

英语中的语气分为三类:

陈述语气(用于陈述句、疑问句、感叹句)

祈使语气(用于祈使句)

虚拟语气(用于条件状语从句、宾语从句等)

二、虚拟语气

如果所说的不是事实,而是一种假设、愿望、建议或是一种实现不了的空想,就用虚拟语气。

三、虚拟语气在非真实条件状语从句中的用法

1、真实条件状语从句与非真实条件状语从句

eg If he doesn’t hurry up, he will miss the bus.( 真实条件状语)

If he was free, he asked me to tell stories.(真实条件状语)

If I were you, I would go at once.(非真实条件状语从句)

If there was no air, people would die.(非真实条件状语从句)

2、虚拟语气在非真实条件状语从句中的用法及动词形式

eg:If I were you, I’d take an umbrella.如果我是你,我会带把伞。(事实:我不可能是你) If I knew his telephone number, I would tell you.

如果我知道他的电话号码,我就会告诉你。(事实:不知道)

If there were no air or water, there would be no living things on the earth.如果没有水和空气,地球上就不会有生物。(事实:地球上既有空气也有水)

100

If I had any money with me, I could lend you some.

如果我带钱了,我就会借给你些。(事实:没带钱)

If he studied harder, he might pass the exam.如果他在努力些,就能通过考试了。(事实:学习不用功)

eg If I had got there earlier, I should/could have met her.

如果我早到那儿,我就会见到她。(事实:去晚了)

If he had taken my advice, he would not have made such a mistake.

如果他听我的劝告的话,就不会犯这样的错误了。(事实:没有听我的话)

eg: If he would come here tomorrow, I should/would talk to him.

如果他哪天来这儿的话,我就跟他谈谈。(事实:来的可能性很小)

If there were a heavy snow next Sunday, we would not go skating.

如果下周日下大雪,我们就不能去滑冰了,(事实:不知能否下雪)

If she were to be there next Monday, I would tell her about the matter.

如果她下周一来这儿的话,我就会告诉她这件事得始末。

四、虚拟语气的其他用法

1、虚拟语气用在wish 后的宾语从句

a、表示与现在事实相反的愿望,谓语动词用过去式

eg: I wish I had your brains.我希望我有你那样的头脑。(事实:我根本比不上你)

b、表示过去事实相反的愿望,谓语动词:had+v-ed

eg: I wish I had known the truth of the matter.我希望我原来知道这件事的真相。(事实:原来不知道)

c、表示将来难以实现的愿望

谓语动词:should/would + 动词原形

eg: I wish I should have a chance again.很难再有这样的机会了。(事实:很难再有这样的机会了)

②虚拟语气用在suggest(建议)、insist(坚持)、demand(要求)、order(命令)等动词后的宾语从句中。

在这种用法中,无论主句谓语动词为何种时态,从句的谓语动词都用:“should + 动 词原形”或只用“动词原形”。

如 He suggested

He insisted

He demand that we (should) take the teacher’s advice

101

He ordered

Unit 5

一、知识点:

1、情态动词表示推测:

(1)must常用于肯定句中,意为“准是、一定”,它表达的肯定程度最大,可以达到100%。

(2)could、might、may的意思是“可能、也许”,表示推测,它们所表达的肯定程度较低,这三个词相比may的可能性稍大一些;他们的肯定程度在20%至80%。

(3)can’t的意思之“不可能”,它相应的肯定形式是must;它的可能性为0% 。

(4)must、could、might和can’t的后面可用一般现在时、现在进行时,表示对现在的动作、状态或正在进行的动作的推测。

例:He might/could be playing basketball now.他现在可能正在打篮球。

I’m sure that she can’t stay at home.我确信她不在家。

He must be walking in the garden.他肯定在花园里散步。

2、 author与writer:

author单纯制作者或作品;writer的意思较多,有“作者、抄写员”等。

3、drop:(1) vt.(及物动词)意思是(有意或无意)让掉下来、投下;放弃、不再干。 例:She dropped the teapot.

He dropped it into the mail-box.

I want to drop math.

(2)vi.(不及物动词)意思是掉下、落下;下降、降低(可与fall互换),

例:The man dropped from the top of the building.

The temperature has suddenly dropped.

Prices dropped.

(3) n.(可数)滴、点滴, a few drops of rain几滴雨

4、exam:用在正式场合,指入学考试,期中、期末考试,正式等级考试。

test:意思是测验、考查、小考,指非正式的阶段性的测试。

quiz:测验、口试、笔试,只简单的临时性的考试。

5、too much太多 much too实在太

6、garbage、rubbish、junk和waste:

(1)garbage废料、垃圾;(厨房倒弃的)剩饭、剩菜。

(2)rubbish=trash垃圾,普通用语,指各种垃圾,英国人常用rubbish,美国人常用trash.

(3)junk破烂物,指废铁、破布等,现在用来指使人发胖的食物。

(4)waste废物,指工厂排出的废水、废气或家庭垃圾等。

7、any用在否定句、疑问句、条件句中。 some用在陈述肯定句中。

8、have no idea不知道 have some/any idea知道。

9、at可表示“再某场合”如:at the meeting/party

10、hope to do sth;hope that从句。 wish to do sth;wish sb to do sth;wish that从句。

11、because引导原因状语从句 because of跟名词或一个短语。

12、however与but:

(1)从语义上看,but所表示的是很明显的对比、转折。

(2)从语法上看,but是并列连词,however是个副词。

(3)从语序上看,but总位于所引导的句首,however可放在句首、句中、句尾。

(4)从标点上看,but之后没有逗号,however之前、之后短语用逗号隔开。

13、本课出现的两例含有宾语从句的特殊句子:

102

(1)What do you think “anxious” means?

(2)Why do you think the man is running?

又如:(1) Where do you guess he lives?(2) What do you think he is doing now?

14、happen指偶然的发生;take place用于计划好的事情或自然的发生;break out(指战争、灾难、疾病等)爆发。

15、neighborhood: (1)临近、附近 (2)街坊、小区、地区

16、raise [reiz] vt.及物动词 举起、提高 Rise [raIz] vi.(不及物动词)上升

二、短语:

1、be long to属于 11、wear a suit穿西装

2、listen to classical music听古典音乐 12、make a movie拍电影

3、at school上学、求学、在学校 13、in our neighborhood在我们附近、在我们小区

4、go to the concert去听音乐会 14、have fun玩耍、取闹

5、have any/some idea知道 have no idea不知道15、his or her own idea她(他)自己的看法

6、a math test on algebra有关代数的数学考试 16、late night深夜

7、the final exam期末考试 17、an ocean of许许多多、无穷无尽的

8、because of因为 18、be care of=look out当心、小心

9、a present for his mother送给她妈妈的礼物 19、pretend to do sth假装干?

10、run for exercise跑步锻炼 20、use up用完、用光

三、句子:

1、If you have any idea where might be please call me.如果你知道它可能在哪,请打电话给我。

2、It’s crucial that I study for it because it counts 30%to the final exam.

关键是我必须学,因为它占期末考试的30%。

3、What do you think “anxious” means?你认为“anxious”是什么意思?

4、He could be running for exercise.他可能是跑步锻炼身体。

5、He might be running to catch a bus.他可能是在跑着赶公共汽车。

6、Why do you think the man is running?你觉得那个男的为什么跑?

7、No more mystery in Bell Tower neighborhood.钟塔附近不再有神秘的事了。

8、One finger can’t left a small stone.独木难支。

9、When an ant says“ocean”,he is talking about a small pool.井底之蛙。

10、It is less of a problem to be poor than to be dishonest.宁穷勿贱。

11、Be careful of the person who does not talk, and the dog that does not bark.

明抢易挡,暗箭难防。

12、You can’t wake a person who is pretending to be asleep.真人不露相。

13、Tell me and I’ll forget. Show me, and I may not remember. Let me try, and I’ll understand.有亲身体验才能明白其中的道理。

14、Don’t let yesterday use up too much of today.过去的就让它过去吧。

15、He who would do great things should not attempt them all along.

一个好汉三个帮。

Unit 6

一、 知识点

103

1.prefer v.更喜爱,更喜欢,相当于like??better,其过去式、过去分词为preferred,常用于以下结构:

(1)prefer+名词、代词I preferred music. Which do you prefer?

(2)prefer+动词不定式“宁愿干??”She prefers to live among the working people.

(3) prefer+v-ing I prefer living abroad.

(4)prefer+动词不定式复合结构:

常见的搭配有:

① prefer??to??喜欢??而不喜欢??(to为介词)

She prefers apples to bananas.

② prefer doing to doing(to为介词)

He prefers running to walking.

③ prefer to do ?? rather than do sth.宁愿干??而不愿干??

They prefer to play games rather than watch TV.

2.gentle:①轻柔,温和(往往指音乐、嗓音或风)

②温柔的,文雅的(往往指人的性格)

3.remind??of??使某人回想起或意识到某人、某事

She reminded me of her sister.

The pictures remind me of my school days.

4.表示“也”的用法:

also 用在句中,too 用在句末,as well 多用于口语,用在句末,这三个表达都用在肯定句。either “也” 用在否定句尾

5. What do you think of ?? =How do you like??

6.as 的用法:

①用作连词“按照”

Please do it again as I told you.

②连词,当??的时候,着重强调两个动词同时发生

She sang as she worked.

③ 表示原因,“因为,由于”比较口语化,语气也较弱,所表示的原因比较明显。 As I didn’t know the way, I asked the policeman.

④as?as? 和??一样

7.over the years多年来 ,往往与现在完成时连用

8.though 不做副词“可是,不过,然而”放在句尾

9. be sure of +n. / pron. /短语

be sure that 从句 }相信,对??有把握

be sure to do 务必??一定?? make sure 确保,核实,查收,弄清楚

10.one of the+最高级+复数名词,最??之一

11.过去分词作定语,表示被动或完成

12. on display=on show

13.interest:①n.兴趣,趣味;②v.使感兴趣

He interested me in football.他使我对足球感兴趣。

I’ve got a lot of books that might interest you.我有许多可能使你感兴趣的书。

14.class 等级,级别,阶级

15. whatever=no matter what

16.suggest:①建议,后跟宾语从句,用虚拟语气;

②表示,暗示,后跟宾语从句,不用虚拟语气。

104

17. energy (n.)=energetic (adj.)

18.honest 该词是元音发音开头,前面的不定冠词用“an”.

19.先行词若为地点或时间时,后面的关系词用关系代词还是关系副词,要看关系词在定语从句中作什么成分。若关系词作定语从句的主语、宾语或定语,用关系代词;若关系词作状语,则用关系副词。

二.短语

1.expect to do sth.期望干?? expect sb. to do sth期望某人干??

2.catch up with追上,赶上

3.different kinds of music各种不同的音乐

4.quiet and gentle songs轻柔的歌曲 5. take?to? 带??到??

6. remind?of?使某人想起或意识到?? 7.her own songs她自己的歌曲

8.be important to对??重要 9.Yellow River黄河

10.Hong Tao’s latest movie洪涛最近的电影 11.over the years多年来

12.be sure to do sth.务必干??一定干??

13.one of the best known Chinese photographers世界上最有名的中国摄影家之一

14.on display展览,展出 15.come and go来来往往

16.can’t stand不能忍受 17.look for寻找

18.feel sick感到恶心,不舒服 19.have a great time玩得高兴,过得愉快

20.to be honest说实话 21.be lucky to do幸运的是??

22.my six-month English course我6个月的英语课

23.most of my friends我的大部分朋友 24.go for去找某人,想法得到某事物

25.stay healthy保持健康 26.French fries薯条

27.stay away from与??保持距离

28.be in agreement意见一致(后跟短语、句子)

29.barbecued meat烤肉 30.a tag question反意疑问句

31.be bad for对??有害

三.句子

1.I love singers who write their own music.我喜欢自己创作曲子的歌手。

2.We prefer music that has great lyrics.我们更喜欢歌词很棒的曲子。

3.What do you dislike about this CD.你不喜欢这张CD的什么?

4.What does it remind you of?它使你想起了什么?

5.The music reminds me of Brazilian dance music.这首曲子使我想起了巴西舞曲。

6.It does have a few good features, though.然而,它的确也有一些好的方面。

7.She really has something for everyone.每个人的确都能从她的作品中领悟到一些东西。

8.Whatever you do, don’t miss this exhibition.无论怎样,你都不能错过这次展出。

9.As the name suggests, the band has a lot of energy.正如乐队名字所暗示的那样,这支乐队很有活力。

10. Some people say they are boring, but others say they are great.

11.If I were you, I’d eat nuts instead.如果我是你,我会改吃坚果。

Unit7

一、知识点:

1.Would like sth 想要某东西

to do sth 想要干?

sb to do sth 想要××干

2.through 穿过 含有“in”的意思 across 横过 含有“on”的意思

105

3、expect to do sth / sb to do sth / that 从句(不用虚拟语气)

Wish to do sth / sb to do sth / that 从句(用虚拟语气) Hope to do / that 从句(不用虚拟语气)

(没有hope sb to do sth结构)

4. light a.可数名词,灯 b. 不可数名词,光线、日光

c.形容词,轻的,明亮的,浅色的

d.及物动词 点燃 照亮 (过去式,过去分词lit,lit 或lighted ,lighted)

5.Some day=someday 只指将来某一天

one day 既可指将来某一天,也可指过去某一天。

6.Plan 计划打算(1) plan to do sth

We are planning to visit London this summer /Do plan to stay late?

(2) 跟名词或者代词 Have you planned your trip?

We have been planning this visit for months.

(3) plan for 为?做计划He planned for a picnic if the next day were fine.

(4) plan on 打算有(做某事)She had not planned on so many guests.

They are planning on an/for an outing.

7.I’d like to go somewhere relaxing.

Somewhere 在本句中有双重性,对go 来说是副词,对relaxing 来说是不定代词。

8.Consider 考虑,认为

后面只跟动词,动词用“ing”形式

9.else 用在特殊疑问词及不定代词的后面,other 用在名词前,两者都是“别的,其他的”的意思

10.in 在范围之内的某方位。to范围之外的某方位。on在两地边界接壤的某方位。

11.mind介意 mind doing sth; mind one’s doing sth.

12.any用在肯定句中,“任一”

13.so that引的状语从句,“以便,为了”,从句往往有can/may/will/could/might/would等情态动词。

So ?that?如此?以至于that ?引导结果状语从句。

14.Continue to do sth 继续干另外一件事。

Continue doing sth 继续干同一件事

15.在英语中,有although 不能有but;有because 不能有so

16.强调句型:It is(was)?that (who ,whom)?

(1) 强调句型可用来强调各种句子成分

(2) 强调句中的连词who,whom只用来指代人,that 即可以指代人也可以指代物被强调部分是时间,地点等仍用that

(3)that,whom, who 后的句中的谓语与原句保持一致

(4)强调句中只有it is ,it was 两种时态形式,

如:I am right ------It is I who(that) am right.

又如:They will have a meeting tomorrow.

It is they who(that) will have a meeting tomorrow.

It′s a meeting that they will have tomorrow.

It′s tomorrow that they will have a meeting.

二 短语

1.go on vacation 去度假 2.trek through the jungle 徒步穿越丛林

3.some day 有朝一日 4.one of the liveliest cities 最有活力的城市之一

106

5.be supposed to do sth. 应该干。 6.pack light clothes 穿薄衣服

7.take a trip 去旅行

8.provide sb with sth = provide sth for sb 为了某人提供某物

9.be away 离开,远离 10.the answer to the question 问题的答案

11.according to 根据。按照。 12.work as tour guides 做导游的工作

13.dream of 梦想,想到 14.less realistic dreams 不现实的梦想

15.be willing to do sth. 愿意干。16.achieve one’s dreams 实现梦想

17.sail across the pacific 横渡太平洋18.hold on to 保持,不要放弃(卖掉)

19.take it easy 从容 轻松 不紧张 20.Niagara Falls 尼亚加拉大瀑布

21.Eiffel Tower 艾菲尔铁塔 22.Notre Dame Cathedral 巴黎圣母院

23.this time of year 一年中的这个时候

24.in general 通常 ,大体上, 一般而言

三 句子

1. where would you like to go on vacation?

I’d like to trek through the jungle.

2. l like places where the weather is always warm.

3. I like to go somewhere relaxing 我喜欢去休闲的地方

4. For your next vacation, why not consider visiting Paris?

你下次度假为什么不考虑去巴黎?

5. Traveling around Paris by taxi can cost a lot of money.

乘坐出租车游览巴黎要花费很多钱

6. So unless you speak French yourself, it’s best to travel with someone who can translate things for you. 因此,除非你自己会讲法语,否则最好与一个能为你翻译的人一起去。

7. We’d like to be away for three weeks. 我们大约要去三个星期.

8. The person has a lot of money to spend on the vacation. 度假中这个人有很多钱可以花.

9.I hope you can provide me with some information about the kinds of vacations that your firm can offer 我希望能给我提供一些贵公司能经营的旅游项目的信息.

10.Could you please give me some suggestions for vacation spots?你能给我一些有关度假地的建议吗?

11.You need to pack some warm clothes if you go there. 你如果去那里,需要带些暖和的衣服。

12.I’d love to sail across the Pacific.我想横渡太平洋。

Unit 8

一.知识点

1. 动词+副词构成的短语,代词做宾语只能放在中间,名词做宾语可中可后。

如: clean up ; give out ; cheer up ; put up ; write down ; hand out ; call up ; set up ; fix up ; give away ; work out

2 could 表示建议,比can婉转。

3 put off +v-ing

4 put up 举起,悬挂,张贴。

5 Not only ? but also ? 不仅?而且? 强调后者

此结构用来连接主语时,谓语动词按照就近原则,在人称与数上与but also后的名词、代词保持一致。

例:Not also ZhouXia, but also her parents are fond of watching football matches.

此结构可用来连接两个句子,当not only连接的句子位于句首时,该句要部分倒装。 107

例:Not only does Miss Li like music,but also she likes sports.李小姐不但喜欢音乐,还喜欢体育

Not only did he come,but also he was very happy.他不但来了,而且还很高兴。

6.coach ①名词 长途公共汽车、四轮大马车,(运动员的)教练,私人教师。 ②动词 辅导,训练

7.major ① adj. 重要的,主要的 ② n. 专业,专业学生

He is a history major. = He chose history as his major.他是主修历史的学生

vi. 主修,专攻。 He majors in physics. 他主修物理学。

8.volunteer ①可数名词 “志愿者” ②adj. 自愿的

vi. volunteer to do sth

They are the Chinese People’s Volunteers. 他们是中国人民志愿军。

I volunteer to help you. 我自愿帮助你。

9.no longer = not ? any longer 指时间上不再延续。

no more = not ? any more 指动作上不再延续。

10.run out 与 run out of

①run out (become used up). 其主语往往为物。如时间,食物,金钱,油等,本 身就含有被动意义。

His money soon ran out. 他的钱很快就花光了。

My patience has completely run out. 我没有一点耐心了。

Our time is running out. 我们剩下的时间不多了。

②run out of 主语为人,表示主动含义。

He is always running out of money before pay day. 他总是在发工资的日子还没有到就把钱花完了。

两者在一定条件下可以互换

如:The petrol is running out. 汽油快用完了 = We are running out of petrol. 我们快把汽油用完了。

Our time is running out. 我们剩下的时间不多了。 = We are running out of time

11.work out v. + adj.

①结局,结果为

The strategies that he came up with worked out fine. 他提出的这个策略效果很好。 ②算出,制订出,消耗完(精力等)

He never seems to be worked out. 他好像永远不会疲乏似的。

He worked out a plan. 他制订了一个计划。

I have worked out our total expenses. 我已经算出了我们总的费用。

12.homeless 无家可归的

13.donate v. donation n. 捐赠

二.短语

1.clean up 清扫 2.give out 分发,发放

3.cheer up=make?happier 使...高兴,使...振作

4.after school study program 课外学习班

5.come up with=think up 提出,想出 6.put off 推迟

7.write down 写下,记下 8.put up 张贴

9.hand out 分发,发放 10.call up 打电话

11.ser up=establish 建立 12.be home to sb 是某人的家园

13.volunteer one’s time to do sth 自愿花时间干...

108

14.put?to use? 把...投入使用 15.elementary school 小学

16.plan to do sth 计划干...打算干

17.coach a football team for kids 训练少年足球队

18.start a Chinese History club 开办一个中国史俱乐部

19.run out of 用完,耗尽 20.take after 在性格或长相方面与父母相象

21.fix up 修理 22.give away 捐赠

23.be similar to 与...相似 24.ask for 索要

25.a call-in center for parents 家长热线 26.hang out 闲荡

27.put up signs asking for singing jobs 张贴寻求唱歌工作的广告

28.run out of money for singing lessons 学唱歌的钱用完了

29.disabled people 残疾人 30.for sure 确实如此,毫无疑问

31.fill?with... 用...填充... be full of 装满了...

32.help...out 帮助...做事,解决难题(摆脱困境)

33.a specially trained dog 一只经过特殊训练的狗

34.train sb to do sth 训练某人干... 35.fetch my book 把我的书拿来

36.part of speech 词性

三.句子

1.We can’t put off making a plan. Clean-up Day is only two weeks from now. 我们不能推迟制订计划,清洁日离现在只有两周了。

2.She puts this love to good use by working in the after-school care centre at her local elementary school. 她在当地的一所小学的课后辅导中心工作,使这个爱好得到较好的利用

3.Not only do I feel good about helping other people, but I get to spend time doing what I love to do. 帮助别人不但自己感到快乐,而且我开始花时间做自己喜欢做的事了。

4.The three students plan to set up a student volunteer project at heir school. 这三个学生计划在他们校开展一个学生志愿者项目。

5.He also put up some sign asking for old bikes. 他还贴了一些需求旧自行车的广告。

6.The strategies that he came up with worked out fine. 几米想出的这个办法很有效。

7.He did a radio interview. 他接受了电台的采访。

8.We need to come up with a plan. 我们需要指定一个计划。

9.You could help clean up the city parks. 你可以帮助打扫城市公园。

10.He now has sixteen bikes to fix up and give away to children who don’t have bikes. 他现在有16辆要修理的自行车,并准备把这些修好的自行车赠送给那些没有自行车的孩子。

Unit 9 必背内容

重点词组

1. be used for 用来做?? 2. be invented by 由(某人)发明

3. light bulb 电灯泡 4. microwave oven 微波炉

5. by mistake 错误地 6. in the end 最终;最后

7. salty enough 足够咸 8. by accident 偶然;意外

9. not?until? 直到??才?? 10. according to 根据;按照

11. fall into 落入;陷入 12. in this way 这样

13. flying disk 飞碟 14. knock into 撞上(某人)

15. fall down 倒下;摔倒 16. divide?into? 把??分成??

重点句型

109

1. Who was the telephone invented by? It was invented by Bell. 电话是谁发明的? 电话是贝尔发明的。

2. When were electric slippers invented? They were invented last year.

电拖鞋是什么时候被发明的? 它们是去年被发明的。

3. What are they used for? 它们是用来做什么的?

4. They are used for seeing in the dark.它们是用来在黑暗中看东西的。

5. Tea wasn’t brought to the Western world until 1610.直到1610年茶才被带到西方世界。

6. I prefer lemons to oranges. I like the sour taste. 我喜欢柠檬胜过橙子。我喜欢酸味。 Unit 10 By the time I got outside, the bus had already left

重点词组(Key phrases)

1.by the time 到?时候为止 2.get outside 到外边

3.get to school 到学校 4.get up 起床

5.get into the shower 去洗澡 6.get home 到家

7.start doing / to do sth 开始做某事 8.be late for 迟到

9.go off (闹钟)闹响 10.wake up 醒来

11.come out 出来,出现 12.run off 迅速离开,跑掉

13.on time 准时 14.in time 及时

15.come by (走)过来 16.give sb a ride 让某人搭车

17.break down 损坏,坏掉 18.show up 出席,露面

19.stay up 熬夜 20.a costume party 一个化装舞会

21.sth happen to sb 某事发生在某人身上 22.so ?that ? 如此?以至于

23.set off 出发,开始 24.April Fool's Day 愚人节

25.get married 结婚 26.marry sb 与某人结婚

27.both ?and ? 二者?都? 28.get dressed 穿好衣服

29.on the first day 在第一天

语法重点(Grammar Focus)

1.Past perfect Tense 过去完成时

构成:had+过去分词(had没有人称和数的变化)

过去完成时可以表示过去某一时刻或某一动作之前完成的动作或呈现的状态。也就是说发生在“过去的过去”。既然过去完成时的动作发生在过去某一时间之前,那么,使用过去完成时就必须先有这样一个过去的时间。

eg.I had finished my homework before supper. 我在晚饭前把作业做完了。

2.when 和by the time引导的时间状语从句

by the time 到??时候为止,指从过去某一点到,从句所示的时间为止,这一时间段。when当??时候,指过去的某一时间点。从句用一般现在时,主句为过去完成时。 eg.By the time she got up, her brother had already gone into the bathroom.

到她起床的时候,她的弟弟已经去洗澡间了。

When she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home

当她到学校的时候,她意识到她把书包放在家里了。

(在这句话中,过去的时间点为“到校”的时候,“她把书包放在家里”则发生在“过去的过去”。)

疑难解析(Key Points)

1.get to 意为“到达”。例如:When did you get there last night? 你昨晚什么时候到那儿的? I get home at 7:00 every day.我每天7:00到家。

When I got to the cinema, the film had already begun.我到电影院时,电影已经开始了。 110

辨析:get, arrive与reach

这三个词都可以用来表示“到达”,但是用法不同。

(1)get和arrive都是不及物动词,其后只能跟表示地点的副词,若是跟名词则须再加介词,即get to +地点名词,arrive in / at +地点名词(in 之后跟表示大地方的词,at之后跟表示小地方的词)。若是只说“到达”,而不指出到达哪里,则只能用arrive。例如:

How did you get / arrive there? 你怎么到那儿的?

I got to / arrived in Beijing the day before yesterday.我前天到的北京。

When do you often get to / arrive at school? 你经常什么时候到校?

When will you arrive? 你什么时候到?

(2)reach为及物动词,其后既可跟名词也可跟副词。例如:

I reached Beijing the day before yesterday.我前天到的北京。

We reached here on foot.我们步行到这儿的。

2.关于get的词组小结

在本单元出现大量关于get的词组,要注意背诵:

get to school 到学校 get into the shower 去洗澡

get outside 到外边 get home 到家

get up 起床 get married 结婚

get dressed 穿好衣服 get to class 到班级

get bored 变得无聊 get tired 变得疲劳

3.I've never been late for school, but yesterday I came very close

我上学从未迟到过,但是昨天差一点儿就迟到了。

(1)I've 是I have的缩写,have been late是现在完成时态,现在完成时是指一个动作或状态开始于过去,持续到现在,并可能继续下去,而且对现在产生了一定的影响,其构成是have / has+动词过去分词。例如:

I have been here since 1999.自1999年以来我就在这儿。

We have lived in Jinan for 20 years.我们已经在济南住了20年了。

She hasn't worked for 2 years.她已2年不工作了。

(2)be late for 意为“??迟到”,for为介词,所以其后须跟名词。例如:

Don't be late for the meeting.开会别迟到了。

Jim was late for school again.吉姆上学又迟到了。

Tom has been late for classes twice. 汤姆上课已经迟到两次了。

(3)close在此为副词“接近地,靠近地”。此外came very close意为“到时与迟到很接近”。

4.My alarm clock didn't go off, ? 闹钟没有大响??

go off 意为“爆发,大响”。例如:

Although the alarm clock went off, he didn't wake up.虽然闹钟大响,但是他还是没有醒来。

与go有关的词组还有:

(1)go in for“参加”(竞赛、考试);(作为嗜好、工作)“爱好”。例如:

She goes in for bird-watching.她爱好赏鸟。

(2)go on“进行,继续”。例如:Please go on.请继续。

(3)go on doing sth 或go on with sth“继续做??”。例如:

He went on working without having a rest.他一直工作,没停下来休息过。

(4)go over“调查,视察;越过”。例如:

111

You must go over your lessons before the exam.考试前你必须复习。

5.?and I had to wait for him to come out.??我不得不等他出来。

(1)have to 意为“必须,不得不”。例如:

Do you have to take the test? 你必须考试吗?

Tom has to practice speaking Chinese every day.汤姆每天必须练习讲汉语。

辨析:have to 与must

这两个词都可以表示“必须”。have to 更加强调客观原因,而must则强调主观原因;含有have to 的句子在作句型转换时须借助于助动词do,does或did,而must本身是情态动词,进行句型转换时可以直接通过must改变。例如:

It is raining, we have to stay at home. 天在下雨,我们不得不待在家里。

We must work hard.我们必须努力工作。

Lucy doesn't have to stand.露茜不必站着。

You mustn't play in the street.你不能在街道上玩。

(2)wait 是不及物动词“等待,等候”的意思。可以用于词组wait for sb.“等某人”,wait to do sth.“等着做某事”,wait for sb to do sth.“等某人做某事”。例如:

Who are you waiting for? 你在等谁?

They can't wait to open the presents.他们迫不及待地打开礼物。

You can wait for him to help you.你可以等着他帮你。

6.Unfortunately, by the time I got there, the bus had already left.

不幸的是,我到那儿的时候,公交车已经走了。

unfortunately 是副词“不幸地”,是由fortunately加否定前缀“un”构成的。英语中有一部分词在词首或词尾加上前缀或后缀就可以变成另外一个词。如:lucky(幸运的)-unlucky(不幸的),use(用)-useful(有用的),forget(忘记)-forgetful(健忘的),un作前缀表示“not”的含义,即“un”是一个否定前缀。例如:fit(合适的)-unfit(不合适的),fair (公平的)-unfair(不公平的),known(闻名的)-unknown(不闻名的)等。

7.Luckily, my friend Tony and his Dad came by in his Dad's car and they gave me a ride. 幸运的是,我的朋友托尼和他爸爸坐着他爸爸的车经过,他们让我搭了个便车。

(1)come by 意为“经过,走过;获得,获有”。例如:

Please let the car come by.请让车过去。

Good jobs are not easy to come by.好工作不容易找到。

与come有关的其他词组:

<1>come out”出来;开花;出版”。例如:

The moon has come out.月亮出来了。

It's too cold for the flowers to come out.天太冷了,花不开了。

<2>come about”发生,产生”。例如:

Tell me how the accident came about.告诉我事情是怎么发生的。

<3>come across“(偶然)发现??,遇见??”。例如:

I came across his name on the list.我无意中在名单上发现他的名字。

<4>come after”继??之后,接??而来”。例如:

Sunday comes after Saturday.星期天在星期六之后。

<5>come back”回来”。例如:

When did he come back? 他什么时候回来的?

<6>come to oneself”苏醒,醒过来”。例如:

At last, he came to himself.最后他醒了。

112

<7>come from”来自”。例如:

Julia comes from Australia.朱莉娅来自澳大利亚。

(2)give sb a ride 意为“让某人搭便车”。ride在此为名词“搭车,乘车”的意思。get a ride 意为“搭便车”。例如:

Can you give me a ride, Jack? 杰克,能让我搭个便车吗?

I want to get a ride. 我想搭个便车。

8.I only just made it to my class.我恰好到教室。

make it 意为“成功了,做成了”。这里指的是没有迟到,准时到达。例如:

-Have you got the job? -你得到那份工作了吗?

-Yes, I made it. -是的,我成功了。

9.Have you ever forgotten to bring your homework to school?

你曾忘了把作业带到学校吗?

(1)辨析:forget to do 与forget doing

forget to do 指的是“忘了去做??”,即该事还未做;而forget doing 则指“忘了做了??”,即该事已经做完。例如:

Don't forget to turn off lights when you go out.出去时别忘了关灯。

Sorry, I forgot to bring the books again.对不起,我又忘了带书来了。

Lucy forgot locking the door.露茜忘了已锁了门了。

Tom forgot turning off TV.汤姆忘了关了电视了。

(2)辨析:bring, take

bring 意为“把??拿来,取来”。即把某物从别处拿到说话者所在地;take 意为“把??拿走,取走”,即把某物从说话者所在地拿到别处。例如:

Please bring my English book here. 请把我的英语书拿到这儿来。

You can't take these magazines home. 你不能把这些杂志拿回家。

10.What happened to David on April Fool's Day? 愚人节那天,大卫出什么事了吗?

(1)happen to sb 意为“某人怎么了,发生在某人身上”。例如:

What happened to you? 你怎么了?

What happened to Jim? 吉姆出什么事了?

(2)英语中表示节日时须注意以下几点:

<1>表示“在??节”用介词on;

<2>表示节日的每个词的首字母大写;

<3>用day来表示“节”,且无冠词;

<4>一般用复数名词的所有格,如:Teachers' Day 教师节,Children's Day 儿童节,Women's Day 妇女节等;但也有用单数名词所有格的,如:Mother's Day 母亲节,Father's Day 父亲节等。例如:

Do you often go to parks on Children's Day? 你们儿童节经常去公园吗?

What do you usually do on New Year's Day? 新年你们通常干什么?

Do your friends play jokes on you on April Fool's Day? 你的朋友愚人节跟你开玩笑吗?

11.Welles was so convincing that hundreds of people believed the story, and panic set off across the whole country.

Welles 是如此地让人信任,以致于成百上千的人都相信了这个故事,进而激起了全国性的恐慌。

(1)So ?that?句型中,so后面应加一个形容词或副词,意为“如此??以至于??” eg.This book is so interesting that everyone in our class wants to read it.

这本书是如此的有趣以至于全班同学都想看看。(so+形容词)

113

He ran so fast that I couldn't catch up with him.他跑得那么快,以致于我跟不上他。(so+副)

So?that引导的是表示结果的状语从句,但不“一定要死套”“如此??以至于”的模式来译成汉语。eg.

It was so dark that he couldn't see the faces of his companions.天太黑了,他不能看见同伴的脸。

(2)so that 主要用来引导目的状语从句。其从句中的谓语动词通常和can,may,should等情态动词连用,而且主句和从句之间不使用逗号,意为“以便,使能够”。

eg.They set out early so that they might arrive in time他们早早地出发以便按时到达。 Let's take the front seats so that we may see more clearly.我们坐在前排吧,以便看得更清楚。

(3)set off 意为“出发,开始;引爆;衬托”。例如:

They'll set off on a journey around the world.他们将要出发环球旅行。

Use blue eye-shadow to set off your green eyes.用蓝色眼影衬托你的绿眼睛。

与set有关的其他词组:

<1>set about sth.“开始,着手”。例如:I must set about my packing.我必须开始收拾行装了。

<2>set sb.against sb.“使某人和某人竞争、对抗”。例如:Set yourself against her.跟她竞争。

<3>set in”开始”。例如:The rainy season has set in.雨季已开始了。

<4>set out”出发,启程”。set sth out”展示,陈列”。例如:

They set out at dawn.他们在拂晓出发。

He sets out his ideas clearly in his essay.他在这篇文章中明确地列出了他的观点。

<5>set up”建立,设立”。例如:

The memorial will be set up.纪念碑要建成了。

12.?because the spaghetti farmers in Italy had stopped growing spaghetti.

??因为生产意大利面条的农民停止了生产。

辨析:stop doing 与stop to do

stop doing 指的是“停止做”,即不做了;而stop to do 则是指“停下来去做”,即停下来的目的是去做,也就是开始做。例如:

Stop talking, let's begin our class.不要讲话了,我们开始上课。

You are too fat and you must stop eating too much.你太胖了,你不能吃那么多了。 Please stop to listen to me请停下来听我说。

The mother stopped to look after her baby.那位母亲停下来去照顾她的小宝宝。

13.She was thrilled, because she really wanted to get married.

她震惊了,因为她的确想结婚。

(1)thrill为动词“震颤,使激动”,多用于被动语态be thrilled,表示“很感动,受到震颤的”。例如:

We were thrilled with joy.我们高兴极了。

She thrilled at the good news.她听到那个好消息很兴奋。

(2)want在此为动词“想,想要”,其后可跟名词、代词或动词不定式to do。例如: Do you want an ice-cream? 你想要个冰激凌吗?

I want some bread and milk.我想要些面包和牛奶。

Tom wants to learn to play Chinese chess.汤姆想学下中国象棋。

Does Lucy wants to learn to dance? 露茜想学跳舞吗?

114

(3)marry为动词“嫁,娶,结婚”。表示“嫁给某人”或“娶了某人”都可以用marry sb。

另外,词组get married 意为“结婚”,但这是一个非延续性动词,即它不能跟表示一段时间的词连用。be married 也可以用来表示“结婚”,它是一个延续性词组,可以与表示一段时间的词连用。例如:

John is going to marry Jane约翰要和简结婚了。

Henry didn't marry until he was over fifty.亨利直到过了50岁才结婚。

When are you going to get married? 你准备什么时候结婚?

We have been married for ten years.我们已经结婚十年了。

His uncle will get married next month.他叔叔下个月结婚。

◆ Unit11 Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?

目标语言:ask for information politely

重点句型:P86-1a&1c,P87-2a&2c,p88-3b&4

要求背诵的是p88-3a

知识点:

1.宾语从句的定义:宾语从句就是在复合句中作主句的宾语。

2.宾语从句的引导词:1)连词that引导的宾语从句,在口语和非正式文件中可以省略。

2)由连接代词what, which, who, whose或连接副词when, where, why, how等词引导的宾语从句。3)由连词if或whether引导。如,I hope that you will have a good holiday. He asked who could answer this question. They don’t know if they will visit the history museum tomorrow.

3.宾语从句的语序:宾语从句的语序应当用陈述语序。即,从句的连接词后面是主语+谓语+宾语的语序。注意连接词在句子中当主语时,后面直接跟谓语和宾语。如He asked who could answer these questions. Could you tell us what time the plane leaves?

4.Perhaps, maybe, probably: perhaps表示“可能,也许”,之意但不能肯定,它修饰整个句子。Maybe为副词,表示“或许,大概”之意,一般用于句子的开头,常用于口语。Probably有可能性较大的意味,可以位于句首,也可以位于谓语动词前,情态动词,助动词或be动词的后面。

5.both, either, neither: both表示“两者都”;either表示“两者中的任何一个”;neither表示“两者中任何一个都不”。1)作形容词时,neither,either修饰名词的单数形式,both则修饰名词的复数形式。2)作代词时,neither,either通常被视为单数,both用作复数。作代词时,both还可以作同位语,neither, either则不可以。3)neither…nor意思为“既不…也不…”;either…or意思为“或是….或是…”;both…and…意思为“双方都….;既….又…”三者均为并列连词。即连接两个相同的句子成分。当neither…nor, either…or连接句子的两个主语时,其后谓语动词通常和最邻近的主语在人称及数上保持一致。Both…and….连接句子的两个主语时,其后的谓语动词通常使用复数形式。

6.dress, have on, put on, wear: dress作及物动词用时,指“给某人穿衣服”,dress既可以表示动作,也可以表示状态。Dress表示替别人穿衣服时,接表示人的名词或代词作宾语。如,The mother dressed her son quickly and took him to the kindergarten. Dress表示自己穿衣服这个动作时,接反身代词作宾语,或者用作不及物动词。如,Lily is old enough to dress herself. Dress作不及物动词用,意思是“穿衣,穿礼服”。

◆ unit 12 You’re supposed to shake hands.

目标语言:Tell what you are supposed to do

115

重点句型:P95-2b&2c, P97-1&2b

要求背诵的是P98-3a

知识点:

1.be supposed to do sth.:be supposed是suppose一词的被动语态结构。后接动词不定式时,含义相当于should后接不定式。但should后面的不定式要省略不定式符号to,且属于主动语态形式,使用起来较严肃和正式;而be supposed to do sth的使用教随便,建议性强。否定式为be not supposed to do sth.,另外ought to do sth也是其一个同义表达的形式,但要注意表示过去时,ought后接完成式的不定式,使用时需要灵活掌握和运用。如You are not supposed to shake hands.= You shouldn’t shake hands.= You ought not (oughtn’t) to shake hands.你不应与之握手。

2.Unfamiliar的用法:为形容词,意思为“不熟悉的;没有见过或听过的”,其同义为strange,其反义词为familiar.1) be unfamiliar to…表示“不深知的;生疏的”如,That face is unfamiliar to me.那副面孔我很生疏。2)be unfamiliar with…表示“没听过,没听见,不熟悉的”如,I am unfamiliar with their music.我没听过他们的音乐。

3.used to do sth, be used to do sth, be/get used to sth./ doing sth.: 1) used to do sth意思是“过去常常做某事;过去曾经做某事”,表示过去发生的动作,其中的to do sth为不定式结构。如,I used to take piano lessons.我过去上钢琴课。2)be used to do sth意思为“被用来做某事”,其中的to do sth是不定式结构。如,Paper is used to make kites.纸用来做风筝。3)be/get used to 表示“习惯于”,如果get/be used to后面接动词时,则要使用动词-ing形式。如,She is used to living in the country.她习惯居住在农村。

4. most, mostly, the most:1)most可修饰动词,意思是“最,第一”如,That problem troubles him most.那个问题最使他头痛。Most常可作very 用,修饰kind, helpful, grateful, beautiful等表示主观感觉的形容词和副词。这时不表示比较,不能和the连用。如It’s most kind of you.你真好。Most作代词用,意思为“大多数的,最多的,最大的”。其反义词为fewest,least.2)mostly为副词,表示“大体上,大部分”等意思。如She is mostly out on Sunday.星期天她多半不在家。3)the most表示“最大数量,最大限度”。如,This is the most I can do.这是我力所能及的。

5.Except, besides,but都含有“除了,除…外”的意思。1)except意思为“除…外(不再有)”,其前常接all, any, every, no及其复合词等词。如I answer all the questions except the last one.除了最后一个问题灭有答上外,其余问题我都答上了。2)besides意思为“除…外(还有)”如,I have a few friends besides you. 除了你之外,我还有几个朋友。3)but后接名词,代词和原形动词,可以和except互换,但except后接副词,介词短语时,不能用but 来代替。如,Mary did nothing except/ but clean the dishes.玛丽只洗盘子。

6.point at, point to, point out: point意思为“指着,指向”,在用事物名词作主语时,一般和point to连用,在用人物名词作主语时,常用point at.如,Our teacher is pointing at the map on the wall.我们的老师在指着墙上的地图。The land of the clock points to six.时钟的针指向六。2)point at可以分开来理解,也就是point后直接跟名词或代词作宾语,at表示方向,point to没有这种用法。3)point out是“指出“的意思,属于“动副”结构的短语,虽可跟宾语,但若是代词,须放point和out之间。如,Can you point out the church in this picture?你能指出这张图画中的教堂吗?

◆unit 13 Rainy days make me sad.

目标语言:talk about how things affect you

重点句型: P102-1b&1c, P103-2b, P105-2a

要求背诵的是:P104-3a

知识点:

116

1. make的用法:1)make+名词/代词+形容词或形容词短语 如,The good news made us happy.这条好消息使我们很高兴。2)make+名词/代词+省略to的动词不定式 如,They made us laugh.他们让我们大笑起来。3)make+名词/代词+介词短语或名词短语 如,The boss made her his assistant.老板让她作自己的助理。4)make+名词或代词+过去分词短语 如,Can you make yourself understood in English?你能用英语把意思表达清楚吗?5)make it+时间 如,Let’s make it half past two.让我们把时间约定在2:30吧。

2. would rather, prefer: 1)prefer是一个行为动词,后接带to的不定式,表示一个具体的特定行为,意思为“更喜欢”。如,He preferred to have a part-time job.他宁愿找一份兼职工作。2)两者接不定式时,分别与than和rather than搭配,即prefer to do…rather than do…意思为“宁愿做…而不愿做….”,would rather do…than do…意思为“宁愿做…而不愿做…”.如,Liu Hulan preferred to die rather than surrender.= Liu Hulan would rather die than surrender.刘胡兰宁死不屈。3)prefer…to…相当于like…better than…意思为“喜欢….更胜过喜欢…..”。其后接名词,代词,动词-ing形式。如,I prefer tea to coffee.我喜欢喝茶胜过喜欢喝咖啡。4)prefer和 would rather后都可接从句,从句要用虚拟语气。Prefer后接从句时,用 should加动词原形的形式,should也可以省去,而would rather后接从句时,要用过去时态表示现在和将来,用过去完成时态表示过去。如 I would rather you came on Sunday.我倒希望你星期天来。I prefer that we(should)do it in another way.我更希望我们用另一种方式做这件事。

3. learn…from, learn of, learn…by: 1)learn…from后接表示人的名词,意思为“向…学习”;后接表示事物的名词,意思为“从…中学习”。如,We must learn from Comrade Lei Feng.我们一定要向雷锋同志学习。We have learnt a lot from your lecture.我们从你的报告中学到了很多东西。2)learn of后接表示人或事物的名词,意思为“听说,了解到”,相当于hear of。指间接地获得信息,有时可用介词about代替of,但learn about还有“学习有关方面知识”的意思。如,We were sorry to learn of his failure.听到他失败的消息我们非常遗憾。3)learn..by后接表示事物的名词或动词。接表示事物的名词时,意思为“从…学习”,可与learn from互换;接动词-ing形式时,意思为“通过…方式学习”。如You should learn a language by speaking it.你应当通过说的方式来学习一种语言。另外,learn …by heart是“熟记;背下来”的意思。如You should learn all the words by heart.你应当把所有的单词都背下来。

4. other, another, the other, others, the others: 1)other作前置定语时,修饰单数或复数名词。如I will come again some other days.我改日再来。2)another用于泛指三者以上的不定数目中的“另一个”,其所修饰的名词前不加冠词。如I don’t want this one. Please give me another.我不想要这个,请给我另一个。3)the other表示两者中的“另一个”或两部分中的“另一部分”,是特指。如There are six people in the room.Four are girls, the other two are boys.房间里有六个人,四个是女孩,其余两个是男孩。4)others用作代词,泛指“其他人”或“其他事物”。如,Some are singing and dancing, some are drawing ,others are climbing the hill.一些人在唱歌,跳舞,一些人在画画,还有一些人在爬山。5)the others指整体中除去一部分后,剩余的全部。如 There are fifty-five students in our class. Thirty of us are girls. The others are boys.我们班有五十五名学生,三十人是女生,其余的是男生。

5. compare…to…意思“把…比作….”着重注意两者间的相似点。如,Young people are often compared to the sun at eight or nine in the morning.年轻人常被比作早晨八,九点钟的太阳。2)compare…with…意思为“拿….与…相比,把…与…相比较”,侧重指两者间的区别。如,Compare your composition with hers and you will see whose is better.如果把你的作文与她的加以比较的话,便知谁的较好了。

6. carry, bring, take , get, fetch: carry的意思是“携带,搬运,负担”,即把某人带在 117

身边后把某物带在身上,指随身携带,并将它从一处带到另一处。携带的方式可以是提,扛,背,抱,抬等。Carry不说明带的方向。2)bring的意思是把某人或某物“带来,拿来”,强调方向,即从别处拿到说话人这儿来,而不强调带的方式,其后可跟双宾语。3)take的意思是把某人或某物“带走,拿走”,即说话人这儿带到别处去。4)get和fetch的意思相近,表示到某处去把某人找到并带来,或把某物找到并取来。Get常用于口语中。

◆ Unit 14 Have you packed yet?

目标语言:talk about recent events

重点句型:P111-2a&2b,P114-4

要求背诵的是P112-3a

知识点:

1.现在完成时的构成:have/has+动词的过去分词

2.现在完成时的肯定句:

主语(第一,二人称单复数,第三人称复数)+have

主语(第三人称单数)+has +动词过去分词

3.现在完成时的否定句:主语+have/has+not+过去分词

4.现在完成时的疑问句及回答:Have/Has +主语+过去分词?

5.现在完成时的用法:1)表示一个过去发生并结束的动作对现在产生的结果和影响,可以细分为下列两种情况:a.表示开始于过去的动作刚刚结束,常和just, now , already, yet等连用。如,I have finished my homework now.现在我已经做完作业了。b.表示过去动作的结果现在仍残留着,一般不和时间状语连用。如I have lost my pen.我把钢笔弄丢了。(说明过去某时丢的,现在还没有找到这支钢笔)。2)表继续(动作未结束)。如 I have lived here since 1989.我自从1989年就住在这。(表示现在仍住在这)【注意】表示过去已经开始,持续到现在,而且还继续下去的动作或状态。

6.现在完成时与一般过去时的区别:两种时态都表示过去发生的动作,但现在完成时强调这一动作与现在的联系,对现在产生的结果,影响等,而一般过去时则只表示过去的事实,不表示和现在的关系。表示过去固定时间状语只能与一般过去时连用,而不能与现在完成时连用。表示过去时的时间状语:yesterday, last week, a week ago, on Friday, just now, in the evening, the other day。现在完成时的时间状语:since Monday, until now, for a long time, since I came here, since last week, up to now, lately, recently.

7.look for, find , find out, search: look for表示“寻找”,强调找的动作或过程。2)find表示“找到”,强调找的结果。3)find out表示“找出,查明”之意,指经过调查,观察,询问或研究等手段发现或找到。4)search是指对某一处所,人身进行搜查或指寻找想找的人或物,后面可以接介词for,但比look for语气更强些。

8.go on的其他用法:go on意思为“继续”时,有下列几种用法:1)go on doing sth.意思为“继续做某事”2)go on to do sth意思为“继续做(另一件事)3)go on with sth有时与go on doing互换使用,意思为“继续做某事”。

9.in the last/past +数字+名词表示“在过去的….时间里”,常用于现在完成时的句子中。

10. get back意思为“取回”;get back意思为“回来”,相当于return

11. yet, already:yet用于否定句和疑问句中。Already主要用于肯定句中,用于疑问句中时常表示惊讶。2) yet常放在句尾,也可以紧跟在not的后面,而already则常放在句中。

◆ Unit 15 We’re trying to save the manatees!

目标语言:Debate an issue

重点句型:P119-2a,P120-4

118

要求背诵的是P120-3a

知识点:

1.be proud of…, be proud to do sth, be the pride of…:1)be proud of表示“以…为自豪/骄傲”2)be proud to do sth表示“骄傲/自豪去做某事”3)be the pride of表示“是...的骄傲”

2.be suitable for适合的,恰当的

3.be made from, be made of:1) be made from指制成的东西完全失去了原材料的外形或特性,原材料发生了本质的变化,在成品中已无法辨认。2)be made of意思为“由…构成,由…制成”,但be made of是指未经变化,仍可以看出原材料是什么,保持了原材料的质或形状。

4.长,宽,高的表达法 :数字+量词+形容词。如20 metres wide二十米宽

5.Little, small, tiny: little是一般用语,与great和big相对;small含有“比较小”的意味,与large相对;tiny常和little通用,但little侧重指形体小的,常带有爱惜,赞赏,轻蔑等情感的意味;tiny表示非常小,带有较强的感情色彩;small是就实体而言,按平均大小对比,是“比较小的”,侧重度量,面积,数字等;little也表示“小”,往往指不可数的量。

6.Feed on吃…过日子; 用…喂养

7.Foot的用法:on foot 步行 foot by foot一步一步地 at the foot of在…脚下on one’s feet站立着 set foot in踏进 stand on one’s own feet自立

119

九 年 级 英 语

120 审核:九年级全体英语教师

网站首页网站地图 站长统计
All rights reserved Powered by 海文库
copyright ©right 2010-2011。
文档资料库内容来自网络,如有侵犯请联系客服。zhit326@126.com